DIGITAL CAMERA
En
User’s Manual
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Use the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app to view
manuals anytime, anywhere on your smartphone or
tablet.
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)
digital camera.
To get the most from your camera, please be sure
to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will
be read by all who use the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other
topics.
See page 15 for details.
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before
use to prevent damage to the camera.
D
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
A
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
0
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet
to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.
Nikon
Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App
Store and Google Play.
Download of the app and any product
manuals requires an Internet connection, for which fees may be
levied by your phone or Internet service provider.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 x–xii).
i
Package Contents
Confirm that the package contains the following items:
Df camera
Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the package
also includes a lens.
Memory cards are sold separately (0 363).
Cameras purchased in Japan display menus and messages in
English and Japanese only; other languages are not supported.
We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.
BS-1 accessory shoe cover
BF-1B body cap
EN-EL14a
rechargeable Li-ion
battery (with terminal
cover)
MH-24 battery charger
(plug adapter supplied
in countries or regions
where required; shape
depends on country of
sale.)
DK-26 eyepiece
cap (0 23)
AN-DC9 strap (0 18) UC-E6 USB cable
String for eyepiece cap (0 23)
ViewNX 2 CD Warranty
User’s Manual (this manual)
ii
For Your Safety ........................................................................................x
Notices.................................................................................................... xiii
Introduction 1
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................1
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 15
First Steps ............................................................................................... 18
Basic Photography and Playback 29
Taking Photographs ........................................................................... 29
Basic Playback....................................................................................... 34
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ................................................. 35
Exposure Mode 36
P: Programmed Auto......................................................................38
S: Shutter-Priority Auto..................................................................39
1/3 STEP (Exposure Modes S and M).............................................40
A: Aperture-Priority Auto...............................................................41
M: Manual............................................................................................42
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)..................................44
Release Mode 46
Choosing a Release Mode ................................................................ 46
Self-Timer Mode................................................................................... 48
Mirror up Mode .................................................................................... 50
Table of Contents
iii
Image Recording Options 51
Image Area............................................................................................. 51
Image Quality and Size...................................................................... 55
Image Quality ................................................................................... 55
Image Size.......................................................................................... 58
Focus 59
Autofocus ............................................................................................... 59
Autofocus Mode.............................................................................. 59
AF-Area Mode ..................................................................................62
Focus Point Selection .................................................................... 64
Focus Lock ......................................................................................... 66
Manual Focus........................................................................................ 68
ISO Sensitivity 70
The ISO Sensitivity Dial...................................................................... 70
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ............................................................ 72
Exposure 75
Metering ................................................................................................. 75
Autoexposure Lock............................................................................. 77
Exposure Compensation .................................................................. 79
iv
White Balance 81
White Balance Options ...................................................................... 81
Fine-Tuning White Balance.............................................................. 84
Choosing a Color Temperature ...................................................... 88
Preset Manual ....................................................................................... 90
Viewfinder Photography...............................................................90
Live View (Spot White Balance)..................................................93
Managing Presets............................................................................96
Image Enhancement 100
Picture Controls..................................................................................100
Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 106
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.........................110
Active D-Lighting.......................................................................... 110
High Dynamic Range (HDR)...................................................... 112
Flash Photography 116
Using a Flash .......................................................................................116
i-TTL Flash Control........................................................................ 124
Flash Modes.........................................................................................125
Flash Compensation.........................................................................128
FV Lock ..................................................................................................130
Other Shooting Options 133
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................133
Bracketing ............................................................................................136
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................149
Interval Timer Photography...........................................................156
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................163
Non-AI Lenses................................................................................ 167
Location Data......................................................................................170
v
Live View Photography 172
Focusing in Live View ..................................................................175
Using the P Button .......................................................................179
The Live View Display: Live View Photography .................180
The Information Display: Live View Photography.............182
Manual Focus .................................................................................183
More on Playback 185
Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................185
Photo Information ........................................................................188
Thumbnail Playback .........................................................................196
Calendar Playback.............................................................................197
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................199
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................201
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................203
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback ................203
The Playback Menu ......................................................................205
Connections 208
Installing ViewNX 2...........................................................................208
Using ViewNX 2..................................................................................211
Copy Pictures to the Computer ...............................................211
View Pictures ..................................................................................213
Printing Photographs.......................................................................214
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................222
vi
Menu Guide 224
Defaults .................................................................................................224
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ..............................229
Playback Folder......................................................................... 230
Hide Image ................................................................................. 230
Playback Display Options...................................................... 232
Image Review ............................................................................ 232
After Delete................................................................................ 233
Rotate Tall................................................................................... 233
Slide Show .................................................................................. 234
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ..............................235
Shooting Menu Bank ..............................................................236
Storage Folder........................................................................... 237
File Naming ................................................................................ 239
Color Space ................................................................................ 240
Vignette Control....................................................................... 241
Auto Distortion Control......................................................... 241
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)................................. 242
High ISO NR................................................................................ 242
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings...............243
Custom Settings Bank ............................................................ 245
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 246
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 246
a2: AF-S Priority Selection ..................................................... 246
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On .......................................247
a4: AF Activation ...................................................................... 247
a5: Focus Point Illumination................................................. 248
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around .............................................249
a7: Number of Focus Points ................................................. 249
b: Metering/Exposure ................................................................. 250
b1: Center-Weighted Area.................................................... 250
b2: Fine-tune Optimal Exposure......................................... 250
c: Timers/AE Lock.......................................................................... 251
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L......................................... 251
c2: Standby timer..................................................................... 251
c3: Self-Timer ............................................................................. 252
c4: Monitor off Delay ..............................................................253
vii
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................253
d1: Beep .......................................................................................253
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ..................................................253
d3: ISO Display...........................................................................254
d4: Screen Tips...........................................................................254
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..............................................254
d6: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................254
d7: File Number Sequence....................................................255
d8: Information Display..........................................................256
d9: LCD Illumination................................................................256
d10: Exposure Delay Mode ...................................................256
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................257
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................257
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................258
e3: Optional Flash.....................................................................258
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash...............................................259
e5: Modeling Flash...................................................................259
e6: Auto Bracketing Set..........................................................259
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M).............................................260
e8: Bracketing Order................................................................260
f: Controls.........................................................................................261
f1: D Button................................................................................261
f2: OK Button..............................................................................261
f3: Multi Selector.......................................................................262
f4: Assign Fn Button.................................................................263
f5: Assign Preview Button......................................................266
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button..................................................267
f7: Customize Command Dials ............................................267
f8: Release Button to Use Dial..............................................269
f9: Slot Empty Release Lock ..................................................269
f10: Reverse Indicators............................................................269
f11: Easy Shutter-Speed Shift...............................................270
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................271
Format Memory Card..............................................................272
Monitor Brightness ..................................................................273
Auto Info Display ......................................................................273
Image Dust Off Ref Photo......................................................274
Flicker Reduction......................................................................276
Time Zone and Date................................................................276
viii
Language .................................................................................... 277
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 277
Image Comment ...................................................................... 278
Copyright Information ...........................................................279
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 280
Virtual Horizon ..........................................................................282
AF Fine-tune .............................................................................. 283
Assign Remote Fn Button ..................................................... 284
Wireless Mobile Adapter ....................................................... 284
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................285
Firmware Version .....................................................................286
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............287
Creating Retouched Copies...................................................... 289
D-Lighting................................................................................... 291
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 292
Trim ............................................................................................... 293
Monochrome............................................................................. 294
Filter Effects................................................................................ 295
Color Balance............................................................................. 296
Image Overlay ........................................................................... 297
NEF (RAW) Processing ............................................................ 300
Resize............................................................................................ 302
Quick Retouch........................................................................... 304
Straighten ................................................................................... 304
Distortion Control.................................................................... 305
Fisheye......................................................................................... 305
Color Outline .............................................................................306
Color Sketch............................................................................... 306
Perspective Control................................................................. 307
Miniature Effect ........................................................................308
Selective Color ..........................................................................309
Side-by-side Comparison...................................................... 311
O My Menu/m Recent Settings...................................................313
Recent Settings ............................................................................. 317
ix
Technical Notes 318
Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................318
Other Accessories..............................................................................323
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter.................326
Caring for the Camera......................................................................328
Storage..............................................................................................328
Cleaning ...........................................................................................328
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................329
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................329
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................330
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................331
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................335
Exposure Program (Mode P)..........................................................339
Troubleshooting ................................................................................340
Battery/Display ..............................................................................340
Shooting...........................................................................................341
Playback ...........................................................................................343
Miscellaneous.................................................................................345
Error Messages ...................................................................................346
Specifications......................................................................................352
AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G (Special Edition).......................360
Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................363
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................364
Battery Life...........................................................................................367
Index.......................................................................................................368
x
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with
your eye to the viewfinder, care
should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.
A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns.
Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-
authorized service center for
inspection.
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury.
In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician.
Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
This icon marks warnings.
To prevent possible injury, read all
warnings before using this Nikon product.
A
xi
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
chocking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this
equipment, consult a physician
immediately.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.
A Do not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct
contact with the skin for extended
periods may result in low-
temperature burns.
A Do not leave the product where it will be
exposed to extremely high
temperatures, such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution
could cause damage or fire.
A Observe proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled.
Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
• Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery.
If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
•
Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery.
Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged.
To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.
xii
A Observe proper precautions when
handling the charger
• Keep dry.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in injury
or product malfunction due to fire
or electric shock.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with
a dry cloth.
Continued use could
result in fire.
• Do not go near the charger during
thunderstorms.
Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands.
Failure to
observe this precaution could
result in injury or product
malfunction due to fire or electric
shock.
•
Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DC-
to-AC inverters. Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance
with product regulations.
A CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played
back on audio CD equipment.
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
player could cause hearing loss or
damage the equipment.
A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
A Observe caution when using the flash
• Using optional flash units in close
contact with the skin or other
objects could cause burns.
•
Using optional flash units close to
the subject’s eyes could cause
temporary visual impairment. The
flash should be no less than one
meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.
Particular care should be observed
when photographing infants.
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury
due to broken glass and to
prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes or mouth.
A Do not carry tripods with a lens or
camera attached
You could trip or accidentally
strike others, resulting in injury.
A Follow the instructions of airline and
hospital personnel
This camera transmits radio
frequencies that could interfere
with medical equipment or aircraft
navigation. Disable the wireless
network feature and remove all
wireless accessories from the
camera before boarding an aircraft,
and turn the camera off during take
off and landing. In medical facilities,
follow staff instructions regarding
the use of wireless devices.
xiii
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with
this product may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any
language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
specifications of the hardware and
software described in these manuals at
any time and without prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring
any errors or omissions to the
attention of the Nikon representative
in your area (address provided
separately).
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources and
prevent negative consequences for
human health and the environment
that might result from incorrect
disposal.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point.
Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
xiv
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications made
to this device that are not expressly
approved by Nikon Corporation may
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided
by Nikon for your equipment.
Using
other interface cables may exceed the
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this
product may expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Wash hands after
handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug
adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This
power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor
mount position.
xv
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data.
Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky).
Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
preset manual (0 90).
Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically
destroying data storage devices.
xvi
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of
certified documents stipulated by law
is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company.
Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
photographs is governed by national
and international copyright laws.
Do
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers,
batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use
with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the
operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty.
The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.
xvii
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
its operational and safety requirements.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally.
Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area.
See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xviii
X
1
X
Introduction
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays.
You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
Getting to Know the Camera
1
3
4
2
5
7
8
6
91011
1
12
13
14
15
16
17
1 Eyelet for camera strap
2 Exposure compensation dial .......79
3 Exposure compensation dial lock
release ...............................................79
4 ISO sensitivity dial ..........................70
5 ISO sensitivity dial lock release ...70
6 Focal plane mark (E) ...................69
7 Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)................................................. 116
8 Accessory shoe cover.................. 116
9 Shutter-speed dial lock release...39
10 Power switch...................................... 5
11 Shutter-release button..................31
12 Release socket .............................. 323
13 Exposure mode dial ......................... 6
14 D button
LCD illuminator.............................. 5
Two-button reset ..................... 133
15 Control panel..................................... 8
16 Release mode dial ............................ 7
17 Shutter-speed dial..........................39
2
X
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
4
7
14
13
15
16
8
9
10
11
12
6
5
2
3
1 Mirror................................................. 50
2 Metering coupling lever.............167
3 Lens mounting mark ..................... 24
4 D button
Bracketing ................137, 141, 145
5 Self-timer lamp............................... 48
6 Flash sync terminal cap
7 USB connector cover
8 HDMI connector cover
9 Cover for accessory terminal .....325
10 Lens release button ....................... 25
11 AF-mode button.... 60, 63, 175, 176
12 Focus-mode selector ..... 59, 68, 175
13 Flash sync terminal ......................117
14 USB connector .....................211, 214
15 HDMI mini-pin connector ..........222
16 Accessory terminal...................... 325
3
X
7
10
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
11
1 Sub-command dial...................... 267
2 Pv button
Using the Pv
button......................... 41, 174, 266
3 Fn button
Using the Fn button................. 263
4 Battery-chamber/memory card
slot cover ..........................................19
5 Battery-chamber/memory card
slot cover latch ................................19
6 Power connector cover .............. 326
7 CPU contacts
8 Lens mount ......................................24
9 AF coupling
10 Tripod socket
11 Body cap ..................................24, 324
4
X
The Camera Body (Continued)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
19
21
18
1
O button
Delete................................... 35, 203
2 K button
Playback............................... 34, 185
3 Monitor
Viewing settings......................... 11
Viewing pictures......................... 34
Live view.....................................172
Full-frame playback .................185
4 G button
Menu .................................... 15, 224
5 L/U button
Help ............................................... 15
Protect.........................................201
White balance ............................. 82
6 X/T button
Playback zoom in......................199
Image quality/size................56, 58
7 W/M button
Playback zoom out/
thumbnails........................196, 197
Two-button reset......................133
Flash mode.................................126
Flash compensation.................128
8 P
button
Changing settings in the
information display.................... 14
Changing settings during live
view..............................................179
Retouching pictures ................290
9 Viewfinder eyepiece ...................... 23
10 Viewfinder........................................ 28
11 Diopter adjustment control......... 28
12 A button
Using the AE/AF lock
button ........................... 66, 77, 267
5
X
13
B button
AF-ON ............................................60
14 Main command dial .................... 267
15 Metering selector ...........................76
16 J (OK) button .......................16, 261
17 Multi selector...................................16
18 Focus selector lock .........................64
19 Memory card access lamp..... 20, 32
20 R (info) button...............................11
21 a button....................................... 172
A The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown
to turn the camera on.
Rotate the power switch as shown
to turn the camera off.
A The LCD Illuminator
Pressing the
D
button while the camera is on
activates the control panel backlight (LCD
illuminator), allowing the display to be read in
the dark. The backlight will remain lit for about
6 seconds or until the shutter is released or the
D
button is pressed again.
D
button
7
X
The Release-Mode Dial
Rotate the release
mode dial to choose a
release mode (0 46).
Mode Description
S
Single frame
One photograph is taken each
time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
CL
Continuous low
speed
The camera takes
photographs at a slow rate
while the shutter-release
button is pressed.
CH
Continuous
high speed
The camera takes
photographs at a fast rate
while the shutter-release
button is pressed.
J
Quiet shutter-
release
As for single-frame, except
that camera noise is reduced.
E
Self-timer
Take pictures with the self-
timer.
MUP
Mirror up
Raise the mirror before taking
photographs.
Release mode dial
8
X
The Control Panel
14
2
3
5
6
7
8
1 Shutter speed............................39, 42
Number of intervals for interval
timer photography ......................158
2 Battery indicator............................. 29
3 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator .........................................137
WB bracketing indicator.............141
ADL bracketing indicator ...........145
4 Multiple exposure indicator ......150
5 Aperture (f-number)................41, 42
Aperture (number of stops)......... 37
Number of shots per interval ....158
PC mode indicator .......................325
6 Aperture stop indicator ................ 37
7 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)........................................ 30
8 Number of exposures
remaining......................................... 30
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ........................ 47
Preset white balance recording
indicator ........................................... 91
Capture mode indicator..............325
HDMI-CEC connection
indicator .........................................223
9
X
The Viewfinder
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
231
4
17 18 19 23 242221 2620
5678 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16
25
1 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting
d2) ................................................... 253
2 Focus points............................64, 249
AF-area mode..................................62
3 AF area brackets.....................28, 189
4 Focus indicator......................... 32, 69
5 Metering ...........................................75
6 Autoexposure (AE) lock.................77
7 Exposure mode ...............................36
8 Flexible program indicator...........38
9 Shutter speed ........................... 39, 42
Autofocus mode .............................59
10 Aperture (f-number) ............... 41, 42
Aperture (number of stops) .........37
11 Monochrome indicator .............. 100
(displayed when the Monochrome
Picture Control or a Picture Control
based on Monochrome is selected)
12 Low battery warning .....................29
10
X
* Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (0 118). The flash-ready
indicator lights when the flash is charged.
13 Active D-Lighting indicator .......111
14 HDR indicator ................................112
15 ISO sensitivity indicator ................ 70
16 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)........................................ 30
17 FV lock indicator ...........................131
18 Flash sync indicator .....................257
19 Aperture stop indicator ................ 37
20 Exposure indicator ......................... 43
Exposure compensation
display............................................... 80
Roll indicator .................................265
21 Flash compensation indicator...128
22 Exposure compensation
indicator ........................................... 80
23 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator .........................................137
WB bracketing indicator.............141
ADL bracketing indicator ...........145
24 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...... 72
25 Number of exposures
remaining......................................... 30
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ........................ 47
Preset white balance recording
indicator ........................................... 91
Exposure compensation value.... 80
Flash compensation value .........128
ISO sensitivity.................................. 70
AF-area mode.................................. 62
26 Flash-ready indicator
*
................ 121
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim.
This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction.
The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-
charged battery is inserted.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
11
X
The Information Display
Press the R button to display shutter speed,
aperture, the number of exposures
remaining, AF-area mode, and other shooting
information in the monitor. The display lights
automatically when settings such as white
balance and image quality are changed by
pressing a button and rotating a command
dial.
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
R button
123 56 74
11
9
15
12
13
10
1617181920
25
24
23
21
14
8
22
1 Exposure mode ...............................36
2 Flexible program indicator...........38
3 Flash sync indicator..................... 257
4 Shutter speed ........................... 39, 42
Number of shots in exposure and
flash bracketing sequence ........ 137
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence ....................................... 141
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure)....................................... 151
Focal length (non-CPU lenses)
... 163
Color temperature..........................88
5 Color temperature indicator ........88
6 Aperture stop indicator.................37
Non-AI lens indicator.................. 168
7 Aperture (f-number) ............... 41, 42
Aperture (number of stops) .........37
Bracketing increment ........ 138, 142
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence........................................ 145
Multiple exposure mode............ 150
Maximum aperture (non-CPU
lenses)............................................. 166
12
X
8 Auto-area AF indicator.................. 64
Focus points indicator................... 64
AF-area mode indicator................ 64
3D-tracking indicator .................... 64
9 Exposure indicator ......................... 43
Exposure compensation
display............................................... 80
Bracketing progress indicator
Exposure and flash
bracketing ..................................137
WB bracketing...........................141
10 “Beep” indicator............................253
11 Satellite signal indicator .............171
12 Interval timer indicator...............160
13 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)........................................ 30
14 Number of exposures
remaining......................................... 30
Multiple exposure auto gain
indicator .........................................152
Manual lens number ...................166
15 “Clock not set” indicator...... 27, 276
16 Fn button assignment .................263
17 AE-L/AF-L button assignment .....267
18 Picture Control indicator ............101
19 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator .........................................242
20 Custom settings bank .................245
21 Vignette control indicator ..........241
22 White balance ................................. 81
White balance fine-tuning
indicator ........................................... 85
23 Image quality .................................. 55
24 Image size ........................................ 58
25 Flash mode.....................................125
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or
press the shutter-release button halfway.
The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 253). For information on
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
Custom Setting d8 (Information display, 0 256). The information
display can be set to turn on automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway; for more information, see page 273.
13
X
The Information Display (Continued)
26 28 29 3127 3230
37
34
35
3839404142
46
44
43
45
47
33
36
26 Image area indicator......................52
27 Release mode ..............................7, 46
Continuous shooting speed...... 254
28 Exposure delay mode................. 256
29 FV lock indicator .......................... 131
30 Flash compensation indicator .. 128
Flash compensation value......... 128
31 Multiple exposure indicator...... 153
32 Exposure compensation
indicator............................................80
Exposure compensation value....80
33 ADL bracketing amount............. 111
34 Copyright information ............... 279
35 Camera battery indicator..............29
36 Image comment indicator......... 278
37 ISO sensitivity indicator ................70
ISO sensitivity ..................................70
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ......72
38 Pv button assignment................. 266
39 HDR indicator................................ 113
HDR exposure differential ......... 114
40 Active D-Lighting indicator....... 111
41 High ISO noise reduction
indicator......................................... 242
42 Shooting menu bank.................. 236
43 Autofocus mode .............................59
44 Eye-Fi connection indicator ...... 285
45 Auto distortion control............... 241
46 Metering ...........................................75
47 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator......................................... 137
WB bracketing indicator ............ 141
ADL bracketing indicator........... 145
14
X
The P button
Use the P button for quick access to
frequently-used settings in playback mode
and during viewfinder and live view
photography. During viewfinder
photography, you can press the P button to
change the settings listed at the bottom of
the information display.
Highlight items
using the multi selector and press J to view options for the
highlighted item.
P button
1234 5
10 9 8 7 6
1 Shooting menu bank .................. 236
2 High ISO noise reduction ...........242
3 Active D-Lighting .........................110
4 HDR (High Dynamic Range).......112
5 Pv button assignment .................266
6 Fn button assignment .................263
7 AE-L/AF-L button assignment .....267
8 Picture Control ..............................100
9 Long exposure noise
reduction........................................242
10 Custom settings bank .................245
A Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item
appears in the information display.
Tool tips can
be turned off using Custom Setting d4 (Screen
Tips; 0 254).
A See Also
For information on using the P button to access settings during live
view photography, see page 179, or see page 290 for information on
displaying the retouch options during full-frame playback.
15
X
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus.
To
view the menus, press the G button.
Ta bs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 229)
• C: Shooting (0 235)
• A: Custom Settings (0 243)
• B: Setup (0 271)
• N: Retouch (0 287)
• O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS
(defaults to MY MENU; 0 313)
d
If a d icon is displayed at the
bottom left corner of the monitor,
help can be displayed by pressing
the L (U) button. A description
of the currently selected option or
menu will be displayed while the
button is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to
scroll through the display.
G button
Slider shows position in current
menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
L (U) button
16
X
❚❚ Using Camera Menus
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera
menus.
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
2 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon
for the current menu.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
Move cursor up
Move cursor down
J button: select
highlighted item
Cancel and return to
previous menu
G button
17
X
4 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in
the selected menu.
5 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6 Display options.
Press 2 to display options for
the selected menu item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit without making a selection, press
the G button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
•
While pressing
2
generally has the same effect as pressing
J
, there
are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing
J
.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (0 33).
18
X
First Steps
Attach the Camera Stra
p
Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.
Charge the Battery
The camera is powered by an EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion
battery (supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery
in the supplied MH-24 battery charger before use.
If a plug
adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the adapter,
making sure the plug is fully inserted, then insert the battery and
plug the charger in.
About an hour and 50 minutes are required to fully recharge the
battery when no charge remains. Unplug the charger and remove
the battery when charging is complete.
D Charging the Battery
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5 °C–
35 °C (41 °F–95 °F).
The battery will not charge if its temperature is
below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
Battery charging
Charging complete
19
X
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting batteries or memory cards, rotate the power
switch to OFF.
1 Open the battery-chamber/memory
card slot cover.
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-
chamber/memory card slot cover.
2 Insert the battery.
Insert the battery in the orientation
shown (q), using the battery to keep the
battery latch pressed to one side.
The
latch locks the battery in place when the
battery is fully inserted (w).
D Inserting and Removing Batteries and Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries or
memory cards.
A No Memory Card
If the camera is turned off with a charged
EN-EL14a battery and no memory card inserted,
S will be displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder.
Battery latch
20
X
3 Insert the memory card.
Holding the memory card as shown at
right, slide it in until it clicks into place.
The memory card access lamp will light
for a few seconds.
4 Close the battery-chamber/memory
card slot cover.
D Inserting Memory Cards
Inserting memory cards upside down or
backwards could damage the camera or
the card.
Check to be sure the card is in
the correct orientation.
The cover will not
close if the card is not correctly inserted.
A Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the battery-
chamber/memory card slot cover. Press the
battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow
to release the battery and then remove the
battery by hand.
A Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access
lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the battery-
chamber/memory card slot cover, and press the
card in to eject it (q).
The card can then be
removed by hand (w).
Front
Memory card access
lamp
16
GB
16
GB
21
X
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xii and 335–338 of
this manual.
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C
(32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution could
damage the battery or impair its performance.
Capacity may be
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from
0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery.
If the problem
persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your
retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Do not short the charger terminals; failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
Do not move
the charger or touch the battery during charging.
Failure to observe
this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger
showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially
charged.
Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only.
Unplug when not in
use.
22
X
A Formatting Memory Cards
If this is the first time the memory card will be
used in the camera or if the card has been
formatted in another device, select Format
memory card in the setup menu and follow the
on-screen instructions to format the card
(0 272).
Note that this permanently deletes any
data the card may contain.
Be sure to copy any
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before
proceeding.
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use.
Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards.
Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a
write protect switch to prevent
accidental loss of data. When this switch
is in the “lock” position, the memory
card can not be formatted and photos
can not be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the
monitor if you attempt to release the shutter).
To unlock the memory
card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
Write-protect switch
16
GB
23
X
A The Eyepiece Cap
Use the supplied string to attach the eyepiece cap to the camera strap
as shown.
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure,
attach the eyepiece cap during live view, long time-exposures, self-
timer photography, and on other occasions in which you will not be
looking through the viewfinder while the shutter is open. To remove the
cap, press the clips and lift.
A Removing the Viewfinder Eyepiece
The viewfinder eyepiece must be removed
before optional diopter adjustment viewfinder
lenses can be attached.
To remove the eyepiece,
grasp it lightly between your finger and thumb
and rotate it as shown.
24
X
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed.
The lens generally used in this manual
for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G (Special
Edition).
Attach the lens as shown.
Remove the rear lens cap
Remove the
camera body cap
Align the mounting
marks
Mounting mark (camera)
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
25
X
A Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses.
To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w).
After removing
the lens, replace the lens caps and camera
body cap.
A Lens Focus Mode
If the lens is equipped with a focus mode
switch, select autofocus mode (A, M/A, or A/M).
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 320), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
A Non-CPU/Non-AI Lenses
The camera can be used with non-CPU lenses and lenses not equipped
with AI mechanisms (non-AI lenses; 0 163).
A Image Area
The DX format image area is automatically
selected when a DX lens is attached (0 51).
Image area
26
X
Basic Setup
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the
camera is turned on.
Choose a language and set the time and
date.
Photographs can not be taken until you have set the time
and date.
1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.
2 Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired language and press J.
3 Choose a time zone.
A time-zone selection dialog
will be displayed.
Press 4 or 2
to highlight the local time zone
(the UTC field shows the
difference between the
selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC, in
hours) and press J.
4 Choose a date format.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed.
Press
J to proceed to the next step.
27
X
5 Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Daylight saving time options
will be displayed.
Daylight
saving time is off by default; if
daylight saving time is in effect
in the local time zone, press 1 to highlight On and press J.
6 Set the date and time.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed.
Press 4 or 2 to
select an item, 1 or 3 to
change.
Press J to set the
clock and exit to shooting mode
(note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).
A Setting the Clock
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time using the
Language (0 277) and Time zone and date (0 276) options in the
setup menu.
The camera clock can also be set using data provided by
an optional GPS unit (0 170).
A The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed
or the camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC
adapter (0 323).
Two days of charging will power the clock for about
three months.
If the camera displays a warning at startup stating that
the clock is not set and a
Y
icon flashes in the information display, the
clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to
the correct time and date.
A The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks.
Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.
28
X
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision.
Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before framing pictures in the viewfinder.
1 Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
2 Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter adjustment
control until the AF area
brackets are in sharp focus.
When operating the diopter
adjustment control with your
eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers or
fingernails in your eye.
AF area brackets
Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select
single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 59), single-point AF (0 62), and the
center focus point (0 65), and then frame a high-contrast subject in the
center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
the camera.
With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment
control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder.
If
necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional
corrective lenses (0 324).
s
29
s
Basic Photography and
Playback
Turn the Camera On
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.
1 Turn the camera on.
Turn the camera on.
The
control panel will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.
2 Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the control
panel or viewfinder.
Taking Photographs
Icon
DescriptionControl panel Viewfinder
L — Battery fully charged.
K — Battery partially discharged.
H d
Low battery.
Charge battery or ready
spare battery.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
Battery exhausted; shutter release
disabled.
Charge or exchange battery.
Power switch
30
s
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.
The control panel shows the number of
photographs that can be taken at
current settings (values over 1000 are
rounded down to the nearest hundred;
e.g., values between 2900 and 2999 are
shown as 2.9 k).
When this number
reaches zero, A will flash in the exposure-count displays while
the shutter-speed displays will show a flashing n or j.
Insert another memory card or delete some photos.
Choose an Exposure Mode
Lift the exposure mode dial and rotate it to
the desired setting.
A Image Sensor Cleaning
The camera vibrates the low-pass filter covering the image sensor to
remove dust when the camera is turned on or off (0 329).
31
s
Ready the Camera
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right
hand and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left.
Keep your elbows propped
lightly against your torso for support and
place one foot half a pace ahead of the
other to keep your upper body stable.
When framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation, hold the camera as shown in
the bottom of the three illustrations at right.
Focus and Shoot
1 Press the shutter-
release button
halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
The active focus point
will be displayed.
Focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
Focus point
32
s
2 Check indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the in-focus indicator
(I) will appear in the viewfinder.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 47) will
be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
(0 61).
3 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-
release-button the rest of the
way down to release the
shutter and record the
photograph.
While the
photograph is being recorded
to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light.
Do not eject the memory
card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has
gone out and recording is complete.
Viewfinder display Description
I Subject in focus.
2 Focus point is between camera and subject.
4 Focus point is behind subject.
24
(flashes)
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.
Memory card access lamp
33
s
A The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button.
The camera focuses
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus: press halfway Shoot: press all the way
down
A The Standby Timer
The viewfinder and the control panel shutter speed and aperture
displays will turn off if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds,
reducing the drain on the battery.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to reactivate the display.
The length of time before the standby
timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer, 0 251).
Exposure meters
on
Exposure meters
off
Exposure meters
on
A Camera Off Display
If a battery and memory card are inserted, the
number of exposures remaining will be
displayed when the camera is turned off.
Control panel
34
s
Basic Playback
1 Press the K button.
A photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
2 View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
press 1 and 3 (0 188).
To end playback and return to
shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 232),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for a few
seconds after shooting.
K button
0, 0
1
/
125 F5
.
650
mm
100
100
NC
_
D
F
D
S
C
_
0001
.
JP
G
15
/
10
/
2013 10
:
02
:
28
N
N
OR
OR
M
AL
AL
4928x3280
NIKON D f
1
/
12
35
s
Deleting Unwanted
Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press
the O button.
Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described on the preceding
page.
2 Delete the photograph.
Press the O button.
A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press the O
button again to delete the
image and return to
playback.
To exit without
deleting the picture, press K.
A Delete
To delete selected images (0 205), all images taken on a selected date
(0 206), or all images in the current folder (0 205), use the Delete
option in the playback menu.
O button
#
36
#
Exposure Mode
To choose an exposure mode, lift and rotate
the exposure mode dial.
Mode Description
P
Programmed auto (0 38): Camera sets shutter speed and aperture
for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots and in other
situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings.
S
Shutter-priority auto (0 39): User chooses shutter speed; camera
selects aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
A
Aperture-priority auto (0 41): User chooses aperture; camera selects
shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or bring
both foreground and background into focus.
M
Manual (0 42): User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Set
shutter speed to Bulb (B) or Time (T) for long time-exposures.
37
#
A Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 320), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
Type G
and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
When using non-CPU lenses (0 163), select exposure mode A or M and
adjust aperture using the lens aperture ring. If exposure mode P or S is
selected with a non-CPU lens, the camera will function in exposure
mode A and 7 will appear in the viewfinder. See page 318 for more
information.
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 163)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item
in setup menu (0 163) when a non-CPU lens
is attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel,
rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise
the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with
maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be read
from the lens aperture ring. Aperture for lenses not equipped with AI
mechanisms (non-AI lenses) is adjusted using the lens aperture ring.
Changes to aperture are not shown in the camera displays; use the sub-
command dial to set the camera to the aperture selected with the
aperture ring (0 168).
38
#
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically
adjusts shutter speed and aperture according
to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations.
A Flexible Program
In exposure mode P, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).
Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures
(low f-numbers) that blur background details or
fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion.
Rotate
the dial to the left for small apertures (high
f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow
shutter speeds that blur motion.
All
combinations produce the same exposure.
While flexible program is in effect, a E indicator appears in the
viewfinder.
To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings,
rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed,
choose another exposure mode, or turn the camera off.
A See Also
See page 339 for information on the built-in exposure program.
Main command dial
Viewfinder
39
#
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you rotate the
shutter-speed dial to choose the shutter
speed while the camera automatically selects
the aperture that will produce the optimal
exposure.
The dial locks at settings of 1/3 STEP,
X, and T; to choose another setting, keep the
shutter-speed dial lock release pressed while rotating the dial.
• Settings of T (time, 0 44) and B (bulb, 0 44) take effect only in
exposure mode M.
A See Also
For information on using the command dial to fine-tune the shutter
speed selected with the shutter-speed dial, see Custom Setting f11
(Easy shutter-speed shift; 0 270). See page 347 for information on
what to do if flashing “A” or “%” indicator appears in the shutter-
speed displays.
Shutter-speed dial
Shutter-speed dial lock release
1
/4000 s–
1
/2 s
1–4 s (red)
1
/3 EV steps (0 40)
Flash sync (0 257)
40
#
1/3 STEP (Exposure Modes S and M)
When the shutter-speed dial is
rotated to 1/3 STEP, shutter speed
can be adjusted in increments of
1
/3 EV by rotating the main
command dial; the selected shutter
speed is displayed in the control
panel and viewfinder. Choose from
values between
1
/4000 and 30 s. In
exposure mode M, speeds of “Bulb”
and “Time” can be used to record
long time-exposures.
Main command dial
41
#
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the
aperture while the camera automatically
selects the shutter speed that will produce
the optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture
between the minimum and maximum values
for the lens, rotate the sub-command dial
while the exposure meters are on; the
selected aperture is shown in the control
panel and viewfinder.
A Lenses with Aperture Rings
If Aperture ring is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Customize
command dial) > Aperture setting (0 268), aperture can be set using
the lens aperture ring.
A Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button.
The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (exposure modes P and S) or the value
chosen by the user (exposure modes A and M),
allowing depth of field to be previewed in the
viewfinder.
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether optional flash units that support the
Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 118) will emit a modeling flash
when the Pv button is pressed.
See page 259 for more information.
Sub-command dial
Pv button
42
#
M: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both
shutter speed and aperture. While the
exposure meters are on, rotate the sub-
command dial to set aperture to values
between the minimum and maximum for the
lens; to set shutter speed, keep the shutter-
speed dial lock release pressed while rotating the shutter-speed
dial. Use the exposure indicators to check exposure.
Sub-command dial
Shutter-speed dial
1
/4000 s–
1
/2 s
1–4 s (red)
Long time-exposures
(0 44)
Flash sync (0 257)
1
/3 EV steps (0 40)
43
#
A Lenses with Aperture Rings
If Aperture ring is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Customize
command dial) > Aperture setting (0 268), aperture can be set using
the lens aperture ring.
A The Exposure Indicator
If a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the exposure
indicator in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be
under- or over-exposed at current settings.
If the limits of the exposure
metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.
Optimal exposure Underexposed by
1
/3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV
A See Also
For information on using the command dial to fine-tune the shutter
speed selected with the shutter-speed dial, see Custom Setting f11
(Easy shutter-speed shift; 0 270). For information reversing the
exposure indicators so that negative values are displayed on the right
and positive values on the left, see Custom Setting f10 (Reverse
indicators, 0 269).
44
#
❚❚ Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for long
time-exposures of moving lights, the stars,
night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb (B): The shutter remains open while the
shutter-release button is held down.
To
prevent blur, use a tripod or an optional
wireless remote controller (0 325) or
remote cord (0 325).
• Time (T): Start the exposure by using the shutter-release button
on the camera or on an optional remote cord, or wireless remote
controller.
The shutter remains open for thirty minutes or until
the button is pressed a second time.
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a
stable, level surface. To prevent loss of power before the exposure
is complete, use a fully charged battery or an optional AC adapter
and power connector. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-
spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long exposures;
before shooting, choose On for Long exposure NR in the
shooting menu (0 242).
To prevent light entering via the
viewfinder interfering with photographs or exposure, cover the
viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 23).
1 Rotate the exposure mode
dial to M.
Length of exposure:
35 s
Aperture: f/25
Exposure mode dial
45
#
2 Choose a shutter speed.
Keeping the shutter-speed dial
lock release pressed, rotate the
shutter-speed dial to B (bulb) or
T (time; if the shutter-speed dial
is rotated to 1/3 STEP, you can
choose the shutter speed by
rotating the main command
dial).
At a shutter speed of
“bulb”, the control panel and
viewfinder show A, while
% is displayed when “time” is
selected.
3 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote controller
all the way down.
Keep the shutter-release button pressed
until the exposure is complete.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
4 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes.
Shutter-speed dial
Shutter-speed dial lock release
Bulb
Time
46
k
k
Release Mode
To choose a release mode, rotate the release
mode dial to the desired setting (0 7).
1 Average frame rate with an EN-EL14a battery, continuous-servo AF, manual
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of
1
/200 s or faster,
remaining settings other than Custom Setting d5 at default values, and
memory remaining in memory buffer.
2 Average frame rate with an EN-EL14a battery, continuous-servo AF, manual
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of
1
/200 s or faster, other
settings at default values, and memory remaining in memory buffer.
Choosing a Release Mode
Mode Description
S
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
CL
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records 1–5 frames per second.
1
Frame rate can be chosen
using Custom Setting d5 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 254).
CH
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records up to 5.5 frames per second.
2
J
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not
click back into place while shutter-release button is fully pressed,
allowing user to control timing of click made by mirror, which is
also quieter than in single frame mode.
In addition, beep does not
sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep;
0 253).
E
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 48).
MUP
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the
slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs.
47
k
Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or very small apertures
(high f-numbers), when vibration reduction (available with VR
lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control is on (0 70, 72), or when the
battery is low.
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer
for temporary storage, allowing shooting to
continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card.
Up to 100 photographs can
be taken in succession; note, however, that the
frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (tAA).
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at
current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays in the
viewfinder and control panel while the shutter-release button is
pressed.
The illustration at right shows the display when space remains
in the buffer for about 55 pictures.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light.
Depending on shooting conditions
and memory card performance, recording may take from a few seconds
to a few minutes.
Do not remove the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out.
If the
camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will
not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded.
If the
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
A Live View
If a continuous release mode is used during live view photography
(0 172) , photographs will be displayed in place of the view through the
lens while the shutter-release button is pressed.
A See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d6 (Max.
continuous release, 0 254).
For information on the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 364.
48
k
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-
portraits.
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable,
level surface.
2 Select self-timer mode.
Rotate the release-mode dial to
E.
3 Frame the photograph.
4 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, and then press
the button the rest of the way
down to start the self-timer (note that the timer will not start if
the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which
the shutter can not be released).
The self-timer lamp will start
to flash.
Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the self-
timer lamp will stop flashing.
The shutter will be released ten
seconds after the timer starts. To cancel shooting, select
another release mode.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs and exposure, cover the viewfinder with the supplied
DK-26 eyepiece cap (0 23).
Release mode dial
50
k
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised.
Use of a tripod is
recommended.
1 Select mirror up mode.
Rotate the release-mode dial to
MUP.
2 Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.
3 Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture.
To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly.
The
mirror lowers when shooting ends.
D Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the
viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
A Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
Release mode dial
d
51
d
Image Recording Options
Choose an image area from FX (36×24) 1.0× and DX (24×16) 1.5×.
Image Area
A DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35mm format cameras.
If Auto DX
crop is off and FX (36×24) 1.0× (FX format) is selected for Choose
image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may be
eclipsed.
This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the
edges of the picture are blacked out.
Viewfinder display
Photo with FX
image area (36×24)
Photo with DX
image area (24×16)
52
d
❚❚ Choose Image Area
Choose the image area used when a non-DX
lens is attached or a DX-lens is attached with
Off selected for Auto DX crop (0 53).
❚❚ Auto DX Crop
Choose whether to automatically select a DX
crop when a DX lens is attached.
Option Description
c
FX (36×24)
1.0×
(FX format)
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area
of the image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm), producing an
angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a
35 mm format camera.
a
DX (24×16)
1.5×
(DX format)
An area at the center of the image sensor 23.4 ×
15.5 mm is used to record pictures in DX format.
To
calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in
35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Option Description
On
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is
attached. If another lens is attached, the crop selected for
Choose image area will be used.
Off Crop selected for Choose image area is used.
A The Viewfinder Display
The DX format crop is shown at right; the area
outside the crop can be viewed in gray when Off
is selected for Custom Setting a5 (Focus point
illumination) > AF point illumination (0 248).
DX format
53
d
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the
shooting menu or by pressing a control and rotating a command
dial.
❚❚ The Image Area Menu
1 Select Image area in
the shooting menu.
Press G to display the
menus.
Highlight Image
area in the shooting menu
(0 235) and press 2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight Auto DX crop or
Choose image area and press
2.
3 Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J.
The selected crop is displayed in
the viewfinder (0 52).
A Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information
display.
G button
54
d
❚❚ Camera Controls
1 Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “press + command dials”
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu
(0 266). Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button
(Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, 0 263), the Pv button
(Custom Setting f5, Assign preview button, 0 266), or the A
AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button,
0 267).
2 Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be selected by pressing the selected
button and rotating the main or sub-command dial until the
desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 51).
The option currently selected for image
area can be viewed by pressing the
button to display the image area in the
viewfinder or information display.
FX
format is displayed as “36 – 24” and DX
format as “24 – 16”.
D Auto DX Crop
The selected control can not be used to choose the image area when a
DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on.
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area (0 58).
55
d
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each
photograph occupies on the memory card.
Larger, higher quality
images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more
memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the
memory card (0 364).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Option File type Description
NEF (RAW) NEF
Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly
to the memory card.
Settings such as white
balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
TIFF (RGB)
TIFF
(RGB)
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color).
TIFF is
supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
JPEG fine
JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine quality).
*
JPEG normal
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:8 (normal quality).
*
JPEG basic
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic quality).
*
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF/
JPEG
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
56
d
Image quality can be set by pressing the X (T) button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the information display.
X (T) button Main command dial Information display
A The Shooting Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the
Image quality option in the shooting menu
(0 235).
A NEF (RAW) Images
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such
as Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 325) or ViewNX 2 (available on
the supplied ViewNX 2 CD).
Note that the option selected for image size
does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images; when viewed on a
computer, NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions given for large (#-
size) images in the table on page 58.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images
can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
menu (0 300).
A NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When
photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG
images will be deleted.
57
d
The following options can be accessed from the shooting menu.
Press the G button to display the menus, highlight the desired
option and press 2.
❚❚ JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > Type
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option Description
O
Size priority
Images are compressed to produce relatively
uniform file size.
P Optimal quality
Optimal image quality.
File size varies with scene
recorded.
Option Description
N
Lossless
compressed
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
with no effect on image quality.
O Compressed
NEF images are compressed using a non-
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
Option Description
q 12-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of
12 bits.
r 14-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a
bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
58
d
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels.
Choose from # Large,
$ Medium, or % Small (note that image size varies depending on
the option selected for Image area, 0 51):
Image size can be set by pressing the X (T) button and
rotating the sub-command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the information display.
Image area Option Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.)
*
FX (36×24) 1.0×
(FX format)
Large 4928 × 3280 41.7 × 27.8/16.4 × 10.9
Medium 3696 × 2456 31.3 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
Small 2464 × 1640 20.9 × 13.9/ 8.2 × 5.5
DX (24×16) 1.5×
(DX format)
Large 3200 × 2128 27.1 × 18.0/10.7 × 7.1
Medium 2400 × 1592 20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
Small 1600 × 1064 13.5 × 9.0/ 5.3 × 3.5
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi.
Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
X (T) button Sub command dial Information display
A The Shooting Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the
Image size option in the shooting menu
(0 235).
N
59
N
Focus
This section describes the focus options available when
photographs are framed in the viewfinder.
Focus can be adjusted
automatically (see below) or manually (0 68).
The user can also
select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 64) or use
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing
(0 66).
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-
mode selector to AF.
Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Autofocus
Mode Description
AF-S
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
At default settings, shutter can
only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus
priority; 0 246).
AF-C
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking
(0 60) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as
necessary.
At default settings, shutter can be released whether or
not subject is in focus (release priority; 0 246).
Focus-mode selector
60
N
Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing the AF-mode button
and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the viewfinder.
AF-mode button Main command dial
AF-S AF-C
A The B Button
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing
the B button has the same effect as pressing
the shutter-release button halfway.
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the
subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed.
This
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the
subject will be when the shutter is released.
A See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 246).
For information
on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, 0 246).
See page 175 for information on the
autofocus options available in live view.
B button
61
N
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus.
In these cases, focus manually
(0 68) or use focus lock (0 66) to focus on another subject at the same
distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and the
background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the background.
The focus point contains objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.
62
N
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
• Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 64; the
camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only.
Use with stationary subjects.
• Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 64.
In
AF-C focus mode, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the
selected point.
The number of focus points varies with the mode
selected:
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
- 39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the
viewfinder (e.g., birds).
• 3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 64.
In AF-C
focus mode, the camera will track subjects that leave the
selected focus point and select new focus points as required.
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players).
If the subject
leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release
button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.
63
N
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the focus
point.
If a type G, E, or D lens is used
(0 320), the camera can distinguish human
subjects from the background for improved
subject detection.
The active focus points
are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode, the
main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus
points have turned off.
AF-area mode can be selected by pressing the AF-mode button
and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the viewfinder.
AF-mode button Sub-command dial Viewfinder
A 3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
64
N
Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of 39 focus points that can be used to
compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame.
1 Rotate the focus selector lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to be used
to select the focus point.
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the viewfinder.
AF-area mode Viewfinder AF-area mode Viewfinder
Single-point AF
39-point dynamic-area
AF
*
9-point dynamic-area
AF
*
3D-tracking
21-point dynamic-area
AF
*
Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder.
Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.
A Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A See Also
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before
refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom
Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 247).
See page 177 for
information on the autofocus options available in live view.
Focus selector lock
65
N
2 Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point in the
viewfinder while the exposure
meters are on.
Press J to select
the center focus point.
The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the
multi selector is pressed.
A Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual
focus-point selection is not available.
A See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
Custom Setting a5 (Focus point illumination, 0 248).
For information
on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting
a6 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 249).
For information on choosing
the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi
selector, see Custom Setting a7 (Number of focus points, 0 249).
For
information on changing the role of the J button, see Custom Setting
f2 (OK button, 0 261).
66
N
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition.
If the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (0 61), focus lock can also be used to recompose
the photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject.
Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area
mode (0 62).
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to initiate focus.
Check
that the in-focus indicator (I)
appears in the viewfinder.
2 Lock focus.
AF-C focus mode: With the shutter-
release button pressed halfway
(q), press the A AE-L/AF-L button
(w) to lock both focus and
exposure (an AE-L icon will be
displayed in the viewfinder).
Focus will remain locked while the
A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even
if you later remove your finger
from the shutter-release button.
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks
automatically when the in-focus indicator (I) appears, and
remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-
release button.
Focus can also be locked by pressing the
A AE-L/AF-L button (see above).
Shutter-release button
A AE-L/AF-L button
67
N
3 Recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (AF-S) or keep the A AE-
L/AF-L button pressed, allowing several photographs in
succession to be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject
while focus lock is in effect.
If the subject moves, focus again at the
new distance.
A Locking Focus with the B Button
During viewfinder photography, the B button can be used in place
of the shutter-release button to lock focus (0 60). If AF-ON only is
selected for Custom Setting a4 (AF activation, 0 247), the camera will
not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; instead,
the camera will focus when the B button is pressed, at which point
focus will lock and remain locked until the button is pressed again. The
shutter can be released at any time, regardless of the options selected
for Custom Settings a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 246) and a2 (AF-S
priority selection, 0 246), and the in-focus indicator (I) will not be
displayed in the viewfinder.
A See Also
See Custom setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 251) for
information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 267) for information
on choosing the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button.
68
N
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce
the desired results (0 61).
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode
switch (if present) and camera
focus-mode selector to M.
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring
until the image displayed on the clear matte
field in the viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.
D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens
focus mode switch set to M and the
camera focus-mode selector set to
AF.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the
camera or lens.
Focus-mode selector
69
N
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
The viewfinder focus indicator can be used
to confirm whether the subject in the
selected focus point is in focus (the focus
point can be selected from any of the 39
focus points).
After positioning the subject
in the selected focus point, press the shutter-
release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-
focus indicator (I) is displayed.
Note that with the subjects
listed on page 61, the in-focus indicator may sometimes be
displayed when the subject is not in focus; confirm focus in the
viewfinder before shooting.
For information on using the
electronic rangefinder with optional AF-S/AF-I teleconverters,
see page 321.
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your
subject and the camera, measure from the
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.
The distance between the lens mounting
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm
(1.83 in.).
Focal plane mark
46.5mm
70
S
S
ISO Sensitivity
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and ISO 12800
in increments of
1
/3 EV, or choose from settings of from about 0.3
to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 4 EV above ISO 12800 for special
situations.
ISO sensitivity is selected using the ISO sensitivity dial. Keeping the
ISO sensitivity dial lock release pressed, rotate the dial to the
desired setting.
The selected value is displayed in the
viewfinder while the dial is in motion.
The ISO Sensitivity Dial
ISO sensitivity dial
ISO sensitivity dial lock release
71
S
A Hi 0.3–Hi 4
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 4 correspond to ISO
sensitivities 0.3–4 EV over ISO 12800 (ISO 16000–
204800 equivalent).
Pictures taken at these settings
are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines).
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO
sensitivities 0.3–1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50
equivalent).
Use for larger apertures when lighting is
bright.
Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in
most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are
recommended.
A See Also
For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 242.
72
S
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for Auto ISO sensitivity control > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).
1 Select Auto ISO
sensitivity control for
Auto ISO sensitivity
control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button.
Select
Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu, highlight
Auto ISO sensitivity control and press 2. ISO sensitivity
shows the value selected with the ISO sensitivity dial.
2 Select On.
Highlight On and press J (if
Off is selected, ISO sensitivity
will remain fixed at the value
selected with the ISO sensitivity
dial).
G button
73
S
3 Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto
ISO sensitivity can be selected
using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto
ISO sensitivity is automatically
set to ISO 100; note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the
user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the
value selected by the user will be used instead).
In exposure
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if
underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for
Minimum shutter speed (
1
/2000–1 s, or Auto; in exposure
modes S and M, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal
exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user).
If Auto is
selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on the focal length of the lens. Press J to exit when
settings are complete.
74
S
A Minimum Shutter Speed
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto
and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected
automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note,
however, that Auto is available only with CPU lenses or when lens data
are provided for non-CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is used without lens
data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at
1
/30 s. Shutter speeds may drop
below the selected minimum if optimum exposure can not be achieved
at the ISO sensitivity chosen for Maximum sensitivity.
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities.
Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
to reduce noise (see page 242).
When a flash is used, the value selected
for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected
for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 257). Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
with optional flash units; 0 116), possibly preventing the camera from
selecting slow shutter speeds.
V
75
Z
Exposure
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Metering
Option Description
a
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations.
Camera meters
a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone
distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses
(0 320), distance information (3D color matrix metering II; with
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which
does not include 3D distance information).
With non-CPU lenses,
camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum
aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup
menu (0 164); otherwise camera uses center-weighted
metering.
Z
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be
selected using Custom Setting b1, Center-weighted area,
0 250; if non-CPU lens is attached, area is 12 mm in diameter).
Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with
an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
b
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame).
Circle is centered on current
focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if
non-CPU lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will
meter center focus point).
Ensures that subject will be correctly
exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.
76
Z
To choose a metering method,
rotate the metering selector until
the desired setting is displayed in
the viewfinder.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest
weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b1 (Center-
weighted area, 0 250).
For information on making separate
adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see
Custom Setting b2 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 250).
Metering selector
77
Z
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering to meter exposure.
Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired results.
1 Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected focus
point and press the shutter-release
button halfway.
With the shutter-release
button pressed halfway and the subject
positioned in the focus point, press the
A AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus and
exposure (if you are using autofocus,
confirm that the I in-focus indicator
appears in the viewfinder).
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
2 Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Shutter-release
button
A AE-L/AF-L button
78
Z
A Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-
weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure
mode
Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 38)
S Shutter speed
A Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Note that metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.
A See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
0 251), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
For information on changing the role of the A AE-L/AF-L button,
see Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 267).
79
Z
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is
most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering
(0 75).
Choose from values between –3 EV (underexposure) and
+3 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1
/3 EV. In general, positive
values make the subject brighter while negative values make it
darker.
Exposure compensation is adjusted using the exposure
compensation dial. Keeping the exposure compensation dial lock
release pressed, rotate the exposure compensation dial to the
desired setting.
–1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
Exposure compensation dial
Exposure compensation dial lock release
80
Z
The selected value is shown in the viewfinder while the dial is in
motion.
At values other than 0, the 0 at the center of
the exposure indicators will flash (exposure
modes P, S, and A only) and a E icon will be displayed once a value
is selected.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to 0.
±0 EV –0.3 EV +2.0 EV
A Exposure Mode M
In exposure mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level
and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
background. Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 259) can
be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the
background only.
A See Also
For information on automatically varying exposure, flash level, white
balance, or Active D-Lighting, see page 136.
r
81
r
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most
light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with auto
white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset
white balance.
White Balance Options
Option Color temp.
*
Description
v Auto
3500–
8000 K
White balance is adjusted
automatically. For best results, use
type G, E, or D lens. If optional
flash fires, results are adjusted
appropriately.
Normal
Keep warm lighting
colors
J Incandescent 3000 K Use under incandescent lighting.
I Fluorescent Use with:
Sodium-vapor lamps 2700 K
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).
Warm-white
fluorescent
3000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.
White fluorescent 3700 K • White fluorescent lights.
Cool-white fluorescent 4200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.
Day white fluorescent 5000 K
• Daylight white fluorescent
lights.
Daylight fluorescent 6500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.
High temp. mercury-
vapor
7200 K
• High color temperature light
sources (e.g. mercury-vapor
lamps).
H Direct sunlight 5200 K
Use with subjects lit by direct
sunlight.
82
r
White balance is set by pressing the L (U) button and rotating
the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the
information display.
N Flash 5400 K Use with optional flash units.
G Cloudy 6000 K
Use in daylight under overcast
skies.
M Shade 8000 K
Use in daylight with subjects in
the shade.
K Choose color temp.
2500–
10,000 K
Choose color temperature from
list of values (0 88).
L Preset manual —
Use subject, light source, or
existing photograph as reference
for white balance (0 90).
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
L (U) button Main command dial Information display
A The Shooting Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0 235), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0 84) or measure a value for
preset white balance (0 90).
The Auto option
in the White balance menu offers a choice of
Normal and Keep warm lighting colors,
which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting,
while the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source
from the bulb types.
Option Color temp.
*
Description
83
r
A Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units.
Use preset white balance or set white balance to
Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions.
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths.
While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red.
Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
The camera white balance options are adapted to the
following color temperatures:
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent):
3000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent):
4200 K
• I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
• H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
• N (flash): 5400 K
• G (cloudy): 6000 K
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor):
7200 K
• M (shade): 8000 K
84
r
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image.
White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the L (U)
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
1 Select a white balance
option in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button.
Select
White balance in the
shooting menu, then
highlight a white balance option and press 2.
If an option
other than Auto, Fluorescent, Choose color temp., or Preset
manual is selected, proceed to Step 2.
If Auto or Fluorescent
is selected, highlight the desired setting and press 2.
For
information on fine-tuning preset white balance, see page 97.
G button
85
r
2 Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-
tune white balance.
White
balance can be fine-tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
the green (G)–magenta (M) axis.
The horizontal (amber-blue)
axis corresponds to color
temperature, with each increment equivalent to about 5
mired.
The vertical (green-magenta) axis has the similar
effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters.
3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to
the shooting menu. Fine-tuning is
indicated by an asterisk (“E”) in the
information display.
Adjustment
Coordinates
Increase green
Increase magenta
Increase blue Increase amber
Green (G)
Magenta (M)
Blue (B) Amber (A)
86
r
❚❚ The L (U) Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the L (U) button can be used to fine-tune white
balance on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 85; to fine-tune white
balance when L is selected, use the shooting menu as described
on page 84).
Six settings in both directions are available; each
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (0 87).
Press the L
(U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired
value is shown in the information display.
Rotating the sub-
command dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A).
Rotating the sub-command dial to the right increases the amount
of blue (B).
At settings other than 0, an asterisk (“E”) appears in the
information display.
L (U) button Sub-command dial Information display
87
r
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures.
For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K.
Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10
6
, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
A See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 259), the camera will create several images each
time the shutter is released.
White balance will be varied with each
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance
(0 141).
88
r
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu or by using the L (U) button, multi selector,
and sub-command dial.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
Enter values for the amber-blue and green-magenta axes (0 85).
1 Select Choose color
temp.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Choose color
temp. and press 2.
2 Select a value for amber-
blue.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits
and press 1 or 3 to change.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting.
Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources.
With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
G button
Value for amber (A)-blue (B) axis
89
r
3 Select a value for green-
magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G
(green) or M (magenta) axis and
press 1 or 3 to select a value.
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes and
return to the shooting menu.
If a value other than 0 is
selected for the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis, an asterisk
(“E”) will be displayed in the information display.
❚❚ The L (U) Button
The L (U) button can be used to select the color temperature
for the amber (A)–blue (B) axis only.
Press the L (U) button and
rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in
the information display (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 87).
To enter a color temperature directly in increments of 10 K, press
the L (U) button and press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit and
press 1 or 3 to change.
L (U)
button
Sub-command dial Information display
Value for green (G)-magenta
(M) axis
90
r
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast.
The camera can store up to
four values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-4.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
V
iewfinder Photography
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph.
In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object.
Note that
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; in exposure mode M, adjust exposure so that
the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 43).
Method Description
Direct measurement
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photo and white
balance measured by camera. In live view
photography (0 172), white balance can be
measured in a selected area of the frame (spot
white balance, 0 93).
Copy from existing
photograph
White balance is copied from photo on memory
card (0 96).
91
r
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial
until L appears in the information display.
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-4) is displayed
in the information display.
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly
and then press the button until D
starts to flash in the control panel and
viewfinder.
L (U) button Main command dial Information display
A Measuring Preset White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured during HDR
photography or multiple exposure (0 112, 149).
L (U) button Sub-command dial Information display
Control panel
Viewfinder
92
r
5 Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing,
frame the reference object so that it
fills the viewfinder and press the
shutter-release button all the way down.
The camera will
measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset
selected in Step 3.
No photograph will be recorded; white
balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is
not in focus.
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will
flash in the control panel for about six
seconds, while the viewfinder will
show a flashing a.
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance.
A flashing ba will
appear in the control panel and
viewfinder for about six seconds.
Press
the shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.
A Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected (0 99), 3 will flash in the control
panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value.
Control panel
Viewfinder
Control panel
Viewfinder
93
r
Live View (Spot White Balance)
In live view, white balance can be measured in a selected area of
the frame, eliminating the need to prepare a reference object or
change lenses during telephoto photography.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor.
D Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while
the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end after the
sum of the times selected for Custom Settings c4 (Monitor off delay) >
Information display (0 253) and Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer,
0 251).
A Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White balance
option in the shooting menu displays the dialog
shown at right; highlight a preset and press J.
If
no value currently exists for the selected preset,
white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as
Direct sunlight.
a button
94
r
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial
until L is displayed in the monitor.
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-4) is displayed
in the monitor.
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly and
then press the button until the L icon
in the monitor starts to flash.
Aspot
white balance target (r) will be
displayed at the selected focus point.
L (U) button Main command dial Monitor
L (U) button Sub-command dial Monitor
Monitor
95
r
5 Position the target over a white or grey area.
While D flashes in the display, use the
multi selector to position the r over a
white or grey area of the subject.
6 Measure white balance.
Press J or press the shutter-release
button all the way down to measure
white balance.
The time available to
measure white balance is that selected
for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay) > Live view (0 253).
If the camera is unable to measure white
balance, the message shown at right will
be displayed.
Choose a new white
balance target and repeat the process
from Step 4.
When Preset manual is selected for
White balance in the shooting menu,
the position of the target used to
measure preset white balance will be
displayed on presets recorded during
live view photography.
A Measuring Preset White Balance (Live View Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not set while an HDR exposure is in
progress (0 112).
96
r
Managing Presets
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select L (Preset
manual) for White
balance in the shooting
menu.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Preset manual and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and
press W (M).
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image.
G button
W (M) button
97
r
5 Press J.
Press J to copy the white balance value
for the highlighted photograph to the
selected preset.
If the highlighted
photograph has a comment (0 278), the comment will be
copied to the comment for the selected preset.
A Choosing a Source Image
To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame, press and hold the
X (T) button.
A Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-1–d-4) and press 2 to select another
preset.
A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white balance
as described on page 85.
98
r
❚❚ Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu and press
2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired
preset and press W (M).
3 Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.
4 Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page
107.
W (M) button
99
r
❚❚ Protecting a White Balance Preset
Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance
preset.
Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune
and Edit comment options can not be used.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu and press
2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired
preset and press W (M).
3 Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press 2.
4 Select On.
Highlight On and press J to
protect the selected white
balance preset.
To remove
protection, select Off.
W (M) button
100
J
J
Image Enhancement
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and
software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls.
Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Picture Controls
Option Description
Q Standard
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
R Neutral
Minimal processing for natural results.
Choose for
photographs that will later be extensively processed
or retouched.
S Vivid
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
101
J
1 Display Picture
Controls.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press
2 to display a list of Picture
Controls.
2 Choose a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control and press J.
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
shooting menu (0 106).
Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and
compatible software (0 109).
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.
Picture Control
indicator
G button
102
J
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 106) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Picture Control
list (0 100) and press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting (0 103) and
press 4 or 2 to choose a value.
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings.
Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
3 Press J.
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“E”).
103
J
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option Description
Quick adjust
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments).
For
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid.
Not available with Neutral or
Monochrome Picture Controls.
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Sharpening
Control the sharpness of outlines.
Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Contrast
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Brightness
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
brightness.
Does not affect exposure.
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
Saturation
Control the vividness of colors.
Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Hue
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
Filter
effects
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
photographs.
Choose from Off, yellow, orange, red, and
green (0 105).
Toning
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 105).
104
J
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure
and the position of the subject in the frame.
Use a type G, E, or D lens
for best results.
A Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
A The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W (M) button in Step 2 on page 102
displays a Picture Control grid showing the
contrast and saturation for the selected Picture
Control in relation to the other Picture Controls
(only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is
selected).
Release the W (M) button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto
contrast and saturation are displayed in green in
the Picture Control grid, and lines appear parallel
to the axes of the grid.
A Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous
value for the setting.
Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
105
J
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option Description
Y Yellow Enhances contrast.
Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange
produces more contrast than yellow, red more contrast
than orange.
O Orange
R Red
G Green Softens skin tones.
Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation.
Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
106
J
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Manage Picture
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button.
Highlight
Manage Picture Control
in the shooting menu and
press 2.
2 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press
2.
3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to Step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
modification.
G button
107
J
4 Edit the selected Picture
Control.
See page 103 for more
information.
To abandon any
changes and start over from
default settings, press the O
button.
Press J when settings are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
6 Name the Picture
Control.
The text-entry dialog
shown at right will be
displayed.
By default, new
Picture Controls are named
by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the
name of the existing Picture Control; to use the default name,
proceed to Step 7.
To move the cursor in the name area, hold
the W (M) button and press 4 or 2.
To enter a new letter at
the current cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight
the desired character in the keyboard area and press J.
To
delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O
button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long.
Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
Keyboard
area
Name area
108
J
7 Press X (T).
Press the X (T) button
to save changes and exit.
The new Picture Control
will appear in the Picture
Control list.
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to
delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer
needed.
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the top right corner of the edit display.
Original Picture
Control icon
X (T) button
109
J
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in other Df cameras and software and
then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to
or from the memory card, or to
delete custom Picture Controls from
the memory card, highlight Load/
save in the Manage Picture
Control menu and press 2.
The
following options will be displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera
and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected
custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be
displayed before a Picture Control
is deleted; to delete the selected
Picture Control, highlight Ye s and press J.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the
memory card.
A Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time.
The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls.
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera (0 100) can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or
deleted.
110
J
Preserving Detail in Highlights
and Shadows
Active D-Lightin
g
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast.
Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day.
It is most effective when used with matrix
metering (0 75).
Active D-Lighting off Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
A “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu (0 291) brightens shadows in images after
shooting.
111
J
To use Active D-Lighting:
1 Select Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button.
Highlight
Active D-Lighting in the
shooting menu and press
2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight the desired option
and press J.
If Y Auto is
selected, the camera will
automatically adjust Active
D-Lighting according to
shooting conditions (in exposure mode M, however, Y Auto
is equivalent to Q Normal).
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting.
Uneven shading may be
visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO
sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.
A See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 259), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots (0 145).
G button
112
J
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures.
HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (0 75; with other metering methods
and a non-CPU lens, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent
to about 2 EV).
It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
HDR can not be used with flash lighting, bracketing (0 136),
multiple exposure (0 149), or shutter speeds of B (bulb) or T (time).
1 Select HDR (high
dynamic range).
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight HDR (high
dynamic range) in the
shooting menu and press
2.
+
First exposure
(darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
G button
113
J
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press
2.
Highlight one of the following
and press J.
• To take a series of HDR photographs,
select 6 On (series).
HDR
shooting will continue until
you select Off for HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo).
Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
u appears in the viewfinder when
HDR is enabled.
114
J
3 Choose the exposure
differential.
To choose the difference in
exposure between the two
shots, highlight Exposure
differential and press 2.
The options shown at right will
be displayed.
Highlight an
option and press J. Choose
higher values for high-contrast
subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than
required may not produce the desired results; if Auto is
selected, the camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit
the scene.
4 Choose the amount of
smoothing.
To choose how much the
boundaries between the two
images are smoothed, highlight
Smoothing and press 2.
The options shown at right will
be displayed.
Highlight an
option and press J.
Higher
values produce a smoother
composite image.
Uneven
shading may be visible with
some subjects.
115
J
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when
the shutter-release button is pressed
all the way down.
l k will be
displayed in the control panel and
l u in the viewfinder while the
images are combined; no photographs
can be taken until recording is
complete.
Regardless of the option
currently selected for release mode,
only one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-
release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
The u
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out.
The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting.
Use of
a tripod is recommended.
Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects;
this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing.
A Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot).
Control panel
Viewfinder
116
l
l
Flash Photography
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash
units can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as
described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety
lock for flash units with a locking pin.
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2 Mount the flash unit on the
accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash
unit for details.
Using a Flash
117
l
A The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required.
Do not connect another
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-
curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units.
Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
Before using a
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
118
l
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography.
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
• The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, SB-300, and SB-R200:
• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash
units in up to three groups.
The SU-800 itself is not equipped
with a flash.
Flash unit
SB-910
1
SB-900
1
SB-800 SB-700
1
SB-600 SB-400
2
SB-300
2
SB-R200
3
Feature
Guide No.
4
ISO 100 34/111 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 18/59 10/33
ISO 200 48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 25/82 14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or
N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically
detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available.
3 Controlled remotely with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700
flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm
zoom head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard
illumination.
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture.
If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet, 111÷5.6=approximately
19 ft 10 in.).
For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
119
l
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
CLS-compatible flash units
SB-910
SB-900
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600
SU-800
SB-R200 SB-400 SB-300Commander
Close-up
photography
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
for digital SLR
1
zzz ———zz
Standard i-TTL flash for
digital SLR
z
2
zz
2
———zz
AA Auto aperture z
3
—— — — — ——
ANon-TTL auto z
3
—— — — — ——
GN Distance-priority manual zz—— — ———
MManual zzz ———z
4
z
4
RPT Repeating flash z —— — — — ——
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control zz— zz———
i-TTL i-TTL zz—— — ———
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash
control
— z —— z ———
AA Auto aperture z
5
—— — — — ——
ANon-TTL auto z —— — — — ——
MManual zz—— — ———
RPT Repeating flash z —— — — — ——
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL zzz ——z ——
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash
control
zzz ——z ——
AA Auto aperture z
5
—— — — — ——
ANon-TTL auto z —— — — — ——
MManual zzz ——z ——
RPT Repeating flash zzz —————
Flash Color Information
Communication
zzz ———zz
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
6
zzz z z z ——
FV lock
7
zzz z z z zz
AF-assist for multi-area AF zzz z ————
Red-eye reduction zzz ———z —
Camera modeling illumination zzz z z z ——
Camera flash mode selection — — — — — — zz
Camera flash unit firmware
update
z
8
z —— — ——z
120
l
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
Unless
lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the
setup menu, “A” will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 Can only be selected with camera.
5 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option
in the setup menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless
of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
7 Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes.
8 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the
camera.
A Modeling Illumination
CLS-compatible flash units such as the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
and SB-600 emit a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is
pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to
preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units.
Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e5
Modeling flash (0 259).
121
l
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
SB-50DX
SB-30, SB-27
1
,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-15
SB-23, SB-29
2
,
SB-21B
2
,
SB-29S
2
Flash mode
ANon-TTL auto ✔ — ✔ —
MManual ✔✔✔✔
G Repeating flash ✔ ———
REAR Rear-curtain sync
3
✔✔✔✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled.
Set
flash unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and
AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions.
If the flash unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras.
The Df is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings.
If the flash-ready indicator flashes for
about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at
full power and the photograph may be underexposed.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control.
Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit.
Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
122
l
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye
reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800
provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with
17–135 mm AF lenses,
however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-
assist illumination is available
with 24–105 mm AF lenses,
however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus
points shown at right.
In exposure mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
44.85.66.789.51113
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135 mm
24–34 mm 35–49 mm 50–105 mm
24–135 mm
123
l
A Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash
units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows:
Flash sync Auto FP (0 257)
i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority manual (GN)
Manual
Repeating flash —
Advanced wireless lighting
124
l
i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit (0 118) is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by a
2016-segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for
natural balance between main subject and ambient background
lighting.
If type G, E, or D lens is used, distance information is included
when calculating flash output.
Precision of calculation can be increased
for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum
aperture; see 0 163).
Not available when spot metering is used.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account.
Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.
125
l
Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode Description
Front-
curtain sync
This mode is recommended for most situations.
In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure
modes, shutter speed will automatically be set to values
between
1
/200 and
1
/60 s (
1
/4000 to
1
/60 s with Auto FP High-
Speed Sync; 0 257).
Red-eye
reduction
Choose this mode (available with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 only) to reduce “red-eye” effect
sometimes caused by flash.
Not recommended with
moving subjects or in other situations in which quick
shutter response is required.
Do not move camera during
shooting.
Red-eye
reduction
with slow
sync
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync.
Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Available only with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
and SB-400 in programmed auto and aperture-priority
auto exposure modes.
Use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Slow sync
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to
capture both subject and background at night or under
dim light.
This mode is only available in programmed auto
and aperture-priority auto exposure modes.
Use of tripod
is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
shake.
Rear-curtain
sync
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash
fires just before the shutter closes.
Use to create effect of a
stream of light behind moving objects.
In programmed
auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is
used to capture both subject and background.
Use of
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
126
l
❚❚ Choosing a Flash Mode
To choose the flash mode, press
the W (M) button and rotate the
main command dial until the
desired flash mode is selected in
the information display:
1 Y icon flashes if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.
2 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes P and
A.
In exposure modes S and M, red-eye reduction with slow sync becomes
red-eye reduction.
3 Available only in exposure modes P and A.
In exposure modes S and M, slow
sync becomes front-curtain sync.
4 In exposure modes P and A, flash-sync mode will be set to slow rear-
curtain sync when the W (M) button is released.
W (M) button Main
command dial
Rear-curtain sync
4
Slow sync
3
Front-curtain sync Red-eye reduction
1
Red-eye reduction with
slow sync
1, 2
127
l
A Studio Flash Systems
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the
correct synchronization can not be obtained.
A Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when an optional flash
unit is used:
Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page
P
Set automatically by camera
(
1
/200 s–
1
/60 s)
1, 2
Set automatically
by camera
38
S
Value selected by user
(
1
/200 s–30 s)
2
39
A
Set automatically by camera
(
1
/200 s–
1
/60 s)
1, 2
Value selected
by user
3
41
M
Value selected by user
(
1
/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time)
2
42
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2When 1/250 s (Auto FP) or 1/200 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom
Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 257), speeds as fast as
1
/4000 s are
available with optional flash units that support auto FP high-speed sync.
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity.
When setting
aperture in exposure modes A and M, consult the table of flash ranges
provided with optional flash unit.
A See Also
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1
(Flash sync speed, 0 257).
For information on choosing the slowest
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2
(Flash shutter speed, 0 258).
128
l
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to
+1EV in increments of
1
/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be increased
to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent
unwanted highlights or reflections.
Press the W (M) button and rotate
the sub-command dial until the
desired value is displayed in the
information display.
In general,
choose positive values to make the
main subject brighter, negative
values to make it darker.
At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be
displayed in the information display and
viewfinder after you release the W (M)
button.
The current value for flash
compensation can be confirmed by
pressing the W (M) button.
Normal flash output can be restored by
setting flash compensation to ±0.0.
Flash
compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
W (M) button Sub-command
dial
±0 EV
(W (M) button pressed)
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
129
l
A Optional Flash Units
The flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to
the flash compensation selected with the camera.
A See Also
For information on choosing how flash and exposure compensation
combine, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 259).
For information on automatically varying flash level over a series of
shots, see page 136.
130
l
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame.
Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV
lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only (0 118).
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Select FV lock as the “press” option for
Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button,
0 263), f5 (Assign preview button,
0 266), or f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button,
0 267).
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit (0 118) on the camera
accessory shoe.
3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL, monitor
pre-flash AA, or monitor pre-flash A.
See the Speedlight
instruction manual for details.
131
l
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press button selected in Step 1.
The flash will emit
a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon (e)
will appear in the viewfinder.
6 Recompose the photograph.
7 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the button selected in Step 1 to release FV lock.
Confirm
that the FV lock icon (e) is no longer displayed in the
viewfinder.
132
l
A Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as
follows:
Flash unit Flash mode Metered area
Stand-alone flash
unit
i-TTL
5-mm circle in center of
frame
AA
Area metered by flash
exposure meter
Used with other
flash units
(Advanced Wireless
Lighting)
i-TTL Entire frame
AA
Area metered by flash
exposure meter
A (master flash)
t
133
t
Other Shooting Options
The camera settings listed below
can be restored to default values
by holding the W (M) and D
buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these buttons
are marked by a green dot).
The
control panel turns off briefly
while settings are reset.
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
D button
W (M) button
134
t
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu
1
Option Default 0
Image quality JPEG normal 55
Image size Large 58
White balance Auto > Normal 81
Fine tuning A-B: 0, G-M: 0 84
HDR (high dynamic range) Off
2
112
Auto ISO sensitivity control Off 72
Interval timer shooting Off
3
156
Picture Control settings
4
Unmodified 100
Multiple exposure Off
5
149
1 With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings, only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank
option will be reset (0 236). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.
2 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.
3 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting
time, shooting interval, and number of intervals and shots are not reset.
4 Current Picture Control only.
5 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and
number of shots are not reset.
135
t
❚❚ Other Settings
Option Default 0
Autofocus (viewfinder)
Autofocus mode AF-S 59
AF-area mode Single-point AF 62
Autofocus (live view)
Autofocus mode AF-S 175
AF-area mode Normal-area AF 177
Focus point
1
Center 64
AE lock hold Off 66, 77
Bracketing Off 136
Flash compensation Off 128
Flash mode Front-curtain sync 125
Exposure delay mode
2
Off 256
FV lock Off 130
Flexible program Off 38
+ NEF (RAW) Off 264
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings
bank option will be reset (0 245). Settings in the remaining banks are
unaffected.
136
t
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value.
Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,
auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 119 and 124),
Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to check
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with
different settings for the same subject.
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
1 Select flash or exposure
bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button.
Select
Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu,
highlight an option, and
press J.
Choose AE &
flash to vary both exposure and flash level, AE only to vary
only exposure, or Flash only to vary only flash level.
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
G button
137
t
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
The
number of shots is shown in information display.
At settings other than r, a M icon is
displayed in the control panel. D
appears in the viewfinder, while the
information display provides a bracketing indicator and an
icon showing the type of bracketing: v (exposure and
flash bracketing), w (exposure bracketing only), or x
(flash bracketing only).
D button Main command dial
Number of shots
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
Information display
Viewfinder
138
t
3 Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 0.3 (
1
/3), 0.7 (
2
/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV.
The bracketing programs
with an increment of
1
/3 EV are listed below.
Information display No. of shots Bracketing order (EVs)
00
3 0/+0.3/+0.7
3 0/–0.7/–0.3
20/+0.3
20/–0.3
3 0/–0.3/+0.3
5 0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
A See Also
For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is
performed, see Custom Setting e8 (Bracketing order, 0 260).
D button Sub-command dial
Exposure increment
Information display
139
t
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected.
Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (see page 79).
A bracketing progress indicator can be viewed by activating
the information display.
A segment will disappear from the
indicator after each shot.
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and the bracketing icon (v, w, or
x) is no longer displayed.
The program last in effect will be
restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also
be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 133), although
in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next
time bracketing is activated.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7 Display after first shot
140
t
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken.
Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 137 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)>Number of shots (0 252); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-
timer)>Interval between shots.
In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card.
If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode).
If On is selected for
Auto ISO sensitivity control > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 72) in
exposure modes P, S, and A and no flash is attached, the camera will
modify exposure by varying ISO sensitivity and only vary shutter speed
and/or aperture if the limits of exposure system are exceeded.
Custom
Setting e7 (Auto bracketing (mode M), 0 260) can be used to change
how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual
exposure mode.
Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level
together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level
alone.
141
t
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with
a different white balance.
For more information on white balance,
see page 81.
1 Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
The
number of shots is shown in the information display.
At settings other than r, M and D are
displayed respectively in the control
panel and viewfinder; a y icon and a
bracketing indicator appear in the information display.
D button Main command dial
Number of shots
WB bracketing
indicator
Information display
Viewfinder
142
t
3 Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment.
Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or
3(15mired).
Higher B values correspond to increased
amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of
amber (0 87).
The bracketing programs with an increment of
1 are listed below.
Information display
No. of
shots
White balance
increment Bracketing order (EVs)
01 0
21B 0/1B
21A 0/1A
3 1A, 1B 0/1A/1B
A See Also
See page 87 for a definition of “mired.”
D button Sub-command dial
White balance
increment
Information display
143
t
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than the
number of exposures remaining,
n will flash in the control panel, a
flashing j icon will appear in the
viewfinder as shown at right, and the
shutter release will be disabled.
Shooting can begin when a new
memory card is inserted.
144
t
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and y is no longer displayed.
The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
button reset (0 133), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW).
Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 84).
No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode (0 48), the number of copies specified in the white-
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released,
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) >
Number of shots (0 252).
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
145
t
❚❚ ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
For
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 110.
1 Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
The
number of shots is shown in the information display.
At settings other than r, M and D are displayed
respectively in the control panel and viewfinder; a z icon
and a bracketing indicator appear in the information display.
Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active
D-Lighting off and another at a selected value.
Choose three
to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active
D-Lighting set successively to values between Off and Normal
(three shots), between Off and High (four shots), or between
Off and Extra high 1 or Low and Extra high 2 (five shots). If
you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.
D button Main command dial
Number of shots
ADL bracketing
indicator
Information display
146
t
3 Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.
Active D-Lighting is shown in the information display.
Information display ADL Information display ADL
Y
Auto
P
High
R
Low
c
Extra high 1
Q
Normal
d
Extra high 2
D button Sub-command dial
147
t
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting
shot-by-shot according to the bracketing
program selected.
A bracketing progress
indicator can be viewed by activating the
information display.
A segment will
disappear from the indicator after each
shot.
No. shots: 3
Display after first
shot
148
t
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and z is no longer displayed.
The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
button reset (0 133), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken.
Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
In self-timer mode, the camera will
take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 145 each time the
shutter-release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)>Number of shots (0 252); the interval
between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-
timer)>Interval between shots.
In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card.
If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
149
t
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph.
Multiple exposures can make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably
superior to those in software-generated photographic overlays.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view.
Exit live view
before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting will end
and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no
operations are performed for 30 s.
1 Select Multiple
exposure in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Multiple
exposure in the shooting
menu and press 2.
A Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-
off delay using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 251).
The
maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option
selected for Custom Setting c2.
If the monitor has turned off during
playback or menu operations, shooting will end 30 s after the exposure
meters turn off and a multiple exposure will be created from the
exposures that have been recorded to that point.
G button
150
t
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure
mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following
and press J.
• To take a series of multiple
exposures, select 6 On
(series).
Multiple exposure
shooting will continue until
you select Off for Multiple exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo).
Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in the
control panel.
151
t
3 Choose the number of
shots.
Highlight Number of shots and
press 2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will
be combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
A The Command Dial
If Multiple exposure is selected as the
“+ command dials” option for Custom
Setting f4 (Assign Fn button, 0 263) or f5
(Assign preview button, 0 266), you can
choose the multiple exposure mode by
pressing the selected button and rotating
the main command dial, and the number of
shots by pressing the button and rotating
the sub-command dial. Your selection is
shown in the information display; when
multiple exposure is enabled, multiple
exposure mode is shown as follows: n (with
a B to the right) for On (single photo) and
n (with a o to the right) for On (series).
152
t
4 Choose the amount of gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press
2.
The following options will be
displayed.
Highlight an option
and press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted according
to number of exposures
actually recorded (gain for
each exposure is set to
1
/2 for 2 exposures,
1
/3 for 3
exposures, etc.).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Recommended if background is dark, but note that
photographs may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines).
153
t
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
In continuous release modes (0
46
), the
camera records all exposures in a single
burst.
If On (series) is selected, the camera will continue to
record multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is
pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure
shooting will end after the first photograph.
In self-timer
mode, the camera will automatically record the number of
exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the option selected
for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots
(0
252
); the interval between shots is however controlled by
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots.
In
other release modes, one photograph will be taken each time
the shutter-release button is pressed; continue shooting until
all exposures have been recorded (for information on
interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are
recorded, see page
154
).
The n icon will flash until shooting ends.
If On (series) is selected, multiple
exposure shooting will only end when
Off is selected for multiple exposure
mode; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure
shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure is
complete.
The n icon clears from the display when multiple
exposure shooting ends.
154
t
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number
of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point.
If Auto gain is on, gain will
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (0 133)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
155
t
D Multiple Exposures
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
The shooting information listed in the playback photo information
display (including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the
first shot in the multiple exposure.
ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value for the first shot in each series;
rotating the ISO sensitivity dial while shooting is in progress has no
effect.
A Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting
menu is ignored).
These exposures will then be recorded as a single
photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is
selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will
also end automatically).
A Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.
156
t
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1 Select Interval timer
shooting in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu and press 2.
D Before Shooting
Do not select self-timer (E) or MUP release mode when using the interval
timer.
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor.
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and
date (0 276).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
camera battery is fully charged.
If in doubt, charge the battery before
use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available separately).
G button
157
t
2 Choose a starting time.
Chose from the following
starting triggers.
• To start shooting immediately,
highlight Now and press 2.
Shooting begins about 3 s
after settings are completed; proceed to Step 3.
• To choose a starting time,
highlight Start time and press
2 to display the start time
options shown at right.
Press
4 or 2 to highlight hours or
minutes and press 1 or 3 to
change.
Press 2 to continue.
3 Choose the interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours,
minutes, or seconds; press 1 or
3 to change.
Choose an
interval longer than the time
needed to take the number of
shots selected in Step 4.
If the interval is too short, the
number of photos taken may be less than the total listed in
Step 4 (the number of intervals multiplied by the number of
shots per interval).
Press 2 to continue.
158
t
4 Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots; press 1 or 3 to
change.
Press 2 to continue.
5 Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J (to
return to the shooting menu
without starting the interval
timer, highlight Off and press
J).
The first series of shots will
be taken at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if
Now was selected for Choose start time in Step 2.
Shooting
will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken.
Note that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and
time needed to record images may vary from one interval to
the next, the time between the end of one interval and the
beginning of the next may vary.
If shooting can not proceed
at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of B (bulb)
or T (time) is currently selected in manual exposure mode or
the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be
displayed in the monitor.
Number of
intervals
Number
of shots/
interval
Total
number
of shots
159
t
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken.
Resume shooting (0 161) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs and exposure, cover the viewfinder with the supplied
DK-26 eyepiece cap (0 23).
A Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can not be combined with long time-
exposures (0 44) or live view (0 172).
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.
A Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu.
If white balance bracketing is
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program.
160
t
A During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q
icon in the information display will flash.
Immediately before the next shooting interval
begins, the shutter speed display in the control
panel will show the number of intervals
remaining, and the aperture display will show
the number of shots remaining in the current
interval.
At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-
release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed
and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer expires).
To view current interval timer settings, select
Interval timer shooting between shots.
While
interval timer photography is in progress, the
interval timer menu will show the starting time,
the shooting interval, and the number of
intervals and shots remaining.
None of these
items can be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The
monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each
interval.
161
t
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and
pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off)
• Selecting self-timer (E) or M
UP release mode
To resume shooting:
1 Choose a new starting time.
Choose a new starting time as
described on page 157.
2 Resume shooting.
Highlight Restart and press J.
Note that if interval timer
photography was paused
during shooting, any shots
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.
162
t
❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted.
Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
• Performing a two button reset (0 133)
• Resetting settings for the current shooting menu bank using the
Shooting menu bank item in the shooting menu (
0 236)
• Changing bracketing settings (0 136)
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography
ends.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory buffer is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses
again before each shot).
Shooting will resume with the next
interval.
163
t
Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses can be used in exposure modes A and M, with
aperture set using the lens aperture ring.
By specifying lens data
(lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain
access to the following CPU lens functions.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional flash units (0 119)
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit
supports AA (auto aperture) mode
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
164
t
❚❚ Storing Non-CPU Lens Data
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses.
To enter
or edit data for a non-CPU lens:
1 Select Non-CPU lens
data.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Non-CPU lens
data in the setup menu
and press 2.
2 Choose a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.
G button
165
t
3 Enter the focal length and
aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm) or
Maximum aperture and press
4 or 2 to edit the highlighted
item.
Focal length can be
selected from values between 6 and 4000 mm, maximum
aperture from values between f/1.2 and f/22.
4 Choose a meter coupling
method.
Highlight Exposure meter
coupling and press 2, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight AI
lens and press J to select
(choose Non-AI lens only if the
lens is not equipped with an AI
mechanism; 0 167).
A Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value
greater than the actual focal length of the lens.
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined
maximum aperture of the teleconverter and the lens.
Note that
lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or
out.
The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate
lens numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the
new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time
zoom is adjusted.
166
t
5 Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
The specified focal length and
aperture will be stored under
the chosen lens number.
❚❚ Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data
Lens data for selected non-CPU lenses can be recalled by lens
number as described below.
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “+ command
dials” option for Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button, 0
263
),
Custom Setting f5 (Assign preview button, 0
266
), or f6
(Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0
267
).
2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired lens number appears in the information
display.
Focal length
Maximum
aperture
Main command dial
Lens number
167
t
Non-AI Lenses
The camera can be used with non-AI lenses (i.e., lenses not
equipped with AI mechanisms). Before attaching the lens, be sure
to raise the metering coupling lever; failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to the camera or lens.
❚❚ AI Versus Non-AI Lenses
“Non-CPU” lenses are divided into lenses with AI mechanisms (“AI
lenses”) and those without (“non-AI lenses”).
A Incompatible Lenses
Some non-AI lenses can not be attached even when the meter coupling
lever is raised. See page 320 for more information.
A AI Lenses
Lower the metering coupling lever before attaching AI lenses.
Metering coupling lever
AI lens Non-AI lens
Meter coupling ridge No meter coupling ridge
168
t
❚❚ Taking Pictures with Non-AI Lenses
The lack of an AI mechanism means that camera controls can not
be used to set aperture when a non-AI lens is attached.
For
optimal exposure, you must manually match the camera aperture
setting to the lens.
1 Attach the lens.
Attach a non-AI lens for which you have previously provided
lens data (0 164).
2 Select the lens number (0 166).
Confirm that Non-AI lens is selected for
Non-CPU lens data > Exposure meter
coupling.
“F” will flash in the control panel and f
will appear in the information display.
3 Select exposure mode A or M.
Rotate the exposure mode dial to A or M.
4 Adjust aperture.
Choose an aperture using the lens
aperture ring.
5 Match the camera aperture setting
to the lens.
While the exposure meters are on,
rotate the sub-command dial to set the
camera to the aperture selected in Step 4.
169
t
6 Take pictures.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as necessary to
change the aperture during shooting.
170
t
Location Data
Optional GP-1 and GP-1A GPS units (0 325) embed the following
information in photographs taken while the unit is attached:
longitude, latitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC). These data are displayed in the photo information location
data page (0 188).
❚❚ Attaching a GPS Unit
Turn the camera off and connect the GPS unit to the accessory
terminal (0 325) using the cable supplied with the unit. See the
GPS unit manual for more information.
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options
listed below.
• Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off
automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS unit is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the GPS unit.
• Set clock from satellite: Select Ye s to synchronize the camera clock
with the time reported by the GPS unit.
Option Description
Enable
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for the time selected for Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer, 0 251; to allow the camera time to acquire
location data, the delay is extended by up to one minute
after the exposure meters are activated or the camera is
turned on).
This reduces the drain on the battery.
Disable
Exposure meters do not turn off while a GPS unit is
connected.
171
t
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS unit and is independent of the camera
clock.
A The o Icon
Connection status is shown by the o icon:
• o (static): The camera has established
communication with the GPS unit.
Photo
information for pictures taken while this icon is
displayed include an additional page of
location data (0 194).
• o (flashing): The GPS unit is searching for a
signal.
Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include location
data.
• No icon: No new location data have been received from the GPS unit for
at least two seconds.
Pictures taken when the o icon is not displayed
do not include location data.
x
172
x
Live View Photography
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor.
The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder.
2 Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described on
page 175.
D Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs or exposure, cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK-26
eyepiece cap before shooting (0 23).
a button
173
x
3 Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to focus.
The focus point will flash green while the
camera focuses.
If the camera is able to
focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus,
the focus point will flash red (note that
pictures can be taken even when the
focus point flashes red; check focus in the
monitor before shooting).
Exposure can be locked by pressing
the A AE-L/AF-L button (0 77); focus locks while the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
In exposure mode M,
exposure can be adjusted with the assistance of an exposure
indicator (0 43).
4 Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to shoot.
The monitor
will turn off.
5 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.
A AE-L/AF-L button
174
x
A Exposure Preview (Exposure Mode M Only)
In exposure mode M, pressing the Pv button lets
you preview how the current shutter speed,
aperture, and ISO sensitivity settings affect
exposure.
D Ending Live View
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed.
Live view may also
end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits;
exit live view when the camera is not in use.
Note that the temperature
of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed in the
following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but
this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• Live view has been used for extended periods
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Pv button
175
x
Focusing in Live View
To focus using autofocus, rotate the
focus-mode selector to AF and
follow the steps below to choose
autofocus and AF-area modes.
For
information on focusing manually,
see page 183.
❚❚ Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available in live view:
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed
in the monitor.
Mode Description
AF-S
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
AF-F
Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously until shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus locks
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-mode button Main command dial Monitor
Focus-mode selector
176
x
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Use an AF-S lens.
The desired results may not be achieved with other
lenses or teleconverters.
Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and
the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
The
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus.
The camera may be unable to focus in the following
situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light
source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-
vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or
a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
177
x
❚❚ Choosing an AF-Area Mode
The following AF-area modes can be selected in live view:
Mode Description
!
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits.
The camera automatically detects
and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated
by a double yellow border (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of
35, are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to
choose a different subject, use the multi selector).
If the camera
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will
no longer be displayed.
$
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other
non-portrait subjects.
Use the multi selector to move the focus
point anywhere in the frame, or press J to position the focus
point in the center of the frame.
%
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the
frame.
Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere
in the frame, or press J to position the focus point in the center
of the frame.
A tripod is recommended.
&
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and
press J.
The focus point will track the selected subject as it
moves through the frame.
To end tracking, press J again.
Note
that the camera may be unable to track subjects if they move
quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change
visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too
bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the
background.
178
x
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and rotate
the sub-command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the
monitor.
AF-mode button Sub-command dial Monitor
179
x
Using the P Button
The options listed below can be
accessed by pressing the P
button during live view
photography.
Highlight items
using the multi selector and
press 2 to view options for the
highlighted item.
After
choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
Option Description
Image quality Choose image quality (0 55).
Image size Choose image size (0 58).
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control
(0 100).
Active D-Lighting
Adjust Active D-Lighting to preserve details in
highlights and shadows (0 110).
Monitor brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor
brightness for live view.
Changes to monitor brightness
have no effect on photographs
recorded with the camera.
P button
180
x
The Live View Display: Live View
Photography
Item Description 0
q Time remaining
The amount of time remaining before live
view ends automatically.
Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
184
w
Autofocus mode The current autofocus mode. 175
e
AF-area mode The current AF-area mode. 177
r Focus point
The current focus point.
The display varies
with the option selected for AF-area mode
(0 177).
172
t Exposure indicator
Indicates whether the photograph would be
under- or overexposed at current settings
(exposure mode M only).
43
r
t
q
e
w
181
x
D The Live View Display
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color
fringing, moire, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion
may occur if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at
high speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be
reduced using Flicker reduction (0 276), although they may still be
visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds.
When shooting
in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong
light sources.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage
to the camera’s internal circuitry.
A Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be
obtained when live view is not used.
Metering in live view is adjusted to
suit the live view display, producing photographs with exposure close
to what is seen in the monitor.
183
x
Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 68), rotate
the lens focus ring until the subject is in
focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to
about 15 × for precise focus, press the
X (T) button.
While the view through
the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom
right corner of the display.
Use the multi
selector to scroll to areas of the frame not
visible in the monitor (available only if wide-
or normal-area AF is selected for AF-area
mode), or press W (M) to zoom out.
X (T) button
Navigation window
184
x
D The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
(0 180; the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the
internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for
Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 253—5 s before
the monitor is due to turn off automatically).
Depending on shooting
conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is
selected.
Note that although the count down does not appear during
playback, live view will still end automatically when the timer expires.
A HDMI
If the camera is attached to an HDMI
video device during live view
photography, the camera monitor will
remain on and the video device will
display the view through the lens as
shown at right.
If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI >
Device control option in the setup menu (0 223) before shooting in
live view.
A See Also
For information on using the J button to select the center focus point
or toggle focus zoom, see Custom Setting f2 (OK button; 0 261). For
information on reducing flicker or measuring a value for spot white
balance during live view, see pages 276 and 93.
I
185
I
More on Playback
To play photographs back,
press the K button.
The most
recent photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
Full-Frame Playback
K button
K button
W (M) button
L (U) button
J button
Multi selector
O button
Sub-command
dial
Main command
dial
X (T) button
G button
P button
186
I
To Use Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in order
recorded, 4 to view photographs in
reverse order.
View photo
information
Press 1 or 3 to view information about
current photograph (0 188).
View thumbnails W (M) See page 196 for more information.
Zoom in on
photograph
X (T) See page 199 for more information.
Delete images O
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Press O again to delete photo (0 203).
Change protect
status
L (U)
To protect image, or to remove
protection from protected image, press
L (U) (0 201).
Return to
shooting mode
/
K
Monitor will turn off.
Photographs can be
taken immediately.
Retouch photo P
Create retouched copy of current
photograph (0 287).
187
I
A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for the
Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 233).
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 232),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s
after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation,
images are not rotated automatically during image review).
In
continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the
first photograph in the current series displayed.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay, 0 253).
188
I
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information
as shown below.
Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB
histograms, highlights, and overview data are only displayed if
corresponding option is selected for Playback display options
(0 232).
Location data are only displayed if an optional GP-1 or
GP-1A GPS unit was used when the photo was taken.
File information None (image only) Overview
Location data
Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data
1
/
12
100
NC
_
D
F
D
S
C
_
0001
.
JP
G
15
/
10
/
2013 10
:
02
:
28
N
N
OR
OR
M
AL
AL
4928x3280
0, 0
1
/
125 F 5
.
650
mm
100
100
NC
_
D
F
D
S
C
_
0001
.
JP
G
15
/
10
/
2013 10
:
02
:
28
N
N
OR
OR
M
AL
AL
4928x3280
NIKON D f
1
/
12
L
L
A
T
A
O
L
I
T
N
T
M
I
G
I
E
T
I
T
(
U
T
U
U
D
U
D
T
E
D
E
C
E
)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
E
1
3
1
0
3
3
5
5
1
5
9
m
/
:
º
º
1
1
3
4
0
5
5
3
/
:
.
.
2
0
9
6
0
0
7
9
1
1
6
3
‘
‘
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
100
-
1
RGB
Highlights
Select R, G, B
100
-
1
RGB
Select R, G, B
Highlights
M
E
F
L
A
F
S
T
X
O
E
F
L
Y
,
R
P
C
N
A
N
,
.
A
S
/
S
C
S
M
L
H
P
O
V
M
D
D
L
R
T
O
,
E
E
Y
D
A
,
N
P
E
P
I
G
E
.
S
T
O
H
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
5
5
S
.
0
0
,
,
0
m
1
1
m
/
0
,
1
0
25
+
1
/
/
,
6
1
F
.
5
8
.
6
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
189
I
❚❚ File Information
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options
(0 232).
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S, display shows point where focus first
locked.
If photograph was taken using AF-C, focus point is only displayed if
option other than auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode and camera
was able to focus.
3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in DX format (0 51).
1
/
12
100
NC
_
D
F
D
S
C
_
0001
.
JP
G
15
/
10
/
2013 10
:
02
:
28
N
N
OR
OR
M
AL
AL
4928x3280
11
12
24531
6
78910
1 Protect status................................ 201
2 Retouch indicator ........................ 287
3 Focus point
1, 2
.................................64
4 AF area brackets
1
...........................28
5 Frame number/total number of
frames
6 Image quality...................................55
7 Image size.........................................58
8 Image area
3
.....................................51
9 Time of recording ..................27, 276
10 Date of recording...................27, 276
11 Folder name.................................. 237
12 File name ....................................... 239
190
I
❚❚ Highlights
1 Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that
may be overexposed) for the current channel.
Hold W (M) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle
through channels as follows:
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in DX format (0 51).
100
-
1
RGB
Highlights
Select R, G, B
21
3
1 Image highlights
1
2 Folder number—frame
number
2
.........................................237
3 Current channel
1
W (M) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
191
I
❚❚ RGB Histogram
1 Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that
may be overexposed) for the current channel.
Hold W (M) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle
through channels as follows:
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in DX format (0 51).
100
-
1
RGB
Select R, G, B
Highlights
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
1 Image highlights
1
2 Folder number—frame
number
2
........................................ 237
3 White balance..................................81
Color temperature ......................88
White balance fine-tuning .......84
Preset manual..............................90
4 Current channel
1
5 Histogram (RGB channel).
In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives
pixel brightness, vertical axis
number of pixels.
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)
W (M) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
Highlight display off
192
I
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X (T).
Use the
X (T) and W (M) buttons to zoom in and out
and scroll the image with the multi selector.
The
histogram will be updated to show only the data
for the portion of the image visible in the
monitor.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects with a
wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution
will be shifted to the left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution
will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left.
Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
193
I
❚❚ Shooting Data
M
E
F
L
A
F
S
T
X
O
E
F
L
Y
,
R
P
C
N
A
N
,
.
A
S
/
S
C
S
M
L
H
P
O
V
M
D
D
L
R
T
O
,
E
E
Y
D
A
,
N
P
E
P
I
G
E
.
S
T
O
H
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+
5
5
S
O
T
1
0
0
p
T
,
,
.
m
/
t
S
L
1
H
3
m
i
L
-
/
i
,
V
o
O
B
4
0
R
n
W
L
0
.
-
a
,
0
3
+
O
l
+
0
,
5
n
1
/
/
.
,
6
1
0
F
.
2
8
.
8
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
1 Metering ...........................................75
Shutter speed ........................... 39, 42
Aperture..................................... 41, 42
2 Exposure mode ...............................36
ISO sensitivity
1
................................70
3 Exposure compensation ...............79
Optimal exposure tuning
2
........ 250
4 Focal length ......................... 163, 322
5 Lens data........................................ 163
6 Focus mode............................... 59, 68
Lens VR (vibration reduction)
3
7 Flash type
4
.................................... 116
Commander mode
4
8 Flash mode
4
.................................. 125
9 Flash control
4
............. 118, 121, 258
Flash compensation
4
.................. 128
10 Camera name
11 Image area
5
.....................................51
12 Folder number—frame
number
5
........................................ 237
W
C
P
H
O
I
Q
S
C
B
S
H
I
L
C
U
H
O
R
A
U
T
O
T
I
A
N
I
T
E
E
R
U
C
R
T
G
U
R
K
P
R
H
R
B
S
E
E
A
T
A
A
P
A
N
S
N
T
L
A
C
D
I
T
E
I
A
C
T
J
N
S
O
N
E
R
U
G
S
N
C
L
S
E
T
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
A
s
S
0
3
0
0
0
0
U
R
T
T
G
A
O
B
N
1
D
,
A
R
0
D
,0
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
13 White balance..................................81
Color temperature ......................88
White balance fine-tuning .......84
Preset manual..............................90
14 Color space.................................... 240
15 Picture Control.............................. 100
16 Quick adjust
6
................................ 103
Original Picture Control
7
........... 108
17 Sharpening.................................... 103
18 Contrast.......................................... 103
19 Brightness...................................... 103
20 Saturation
8
.................................... 103
Filter effects
9
................................ 103
21 Hue
8
................................................ 103
Toning
9
................................. 103, 105
194
I
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b2 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 250) has
been set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
4 Displayed only if optional flash unit (0 116) is used.
5 Displayed in yellow if picture is in DX format (0 51).
6 Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
7 Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
8 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
9 Monochrome Picture Controls only.
10 The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright
information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 279.
❚❚ Location Data
N
A
H
V
R
O
C
D
I
E
I
T
R
G
T
S
.
N
O
E
E
U
D
T
C
R
-
T
H
E
L
E
D
I
U
G
C
C
H
T
.
T
R
.
L
:
:
:
:
:
H
N
A
N
D
W
C
T
I
O
U
O
-
A
Y
R
R
T
R
L
R
A
I
I
M
O
M
I
M
N
M
S
A
,
A
G
O
O
L
H
L
H
F
T
,
I
T
I
Y
N
G
I
L
P
O
H
N
T
E
R
G
E
M
R
C
O
MM
E
N
T
:
SPRI
NG
HA
S
C
O
M
E
.
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
26
25
24
27
23
22
22 High ISO noise reduction ...........242
Long exposure noise reduction
...242
23 Active D-Lighting .........................110
24 HDR exposure differential ..........112
HDR smoothing ............................112
25 Vignette control............................241
26 Retouch history.............................287
27 Image comment ...........................278
A
C
R
O
T
P
I
Y
S
R
T
I
G
H
T
:
:
N
N
I
I
K
K
O
O
N
N
T
A
R
O
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
29
28
28 Name of photographer
10
...........279
29 Copyright holder
10
......................279
L
L
A
T
A
O
L
I
T
N
T
M
I
G
I
E
T
I
T
(
U
T
U
U
D
U
D
T
E
D
E
C
E
)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
E
1
3
1
0
3
3
5
5
1
5
9
m
/
:
º
º
1
1
3
4
0
5
5
3
/
:
.
.
2
0
9
6
0
0
7
9
1
1
6
3
‘
‘
N
I
KO
N
Df
100
-
1
2
1
3
4
1 Latitude
2 Longitude
3 Altitude
4 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
195
I
❚❚ Overview Data
1 DX format displayed in yellow (0 51).
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
3 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 116).
1
/
4000
F2
.
8
H
i 0
.
3 50
mm
–
1. 3
+
1
.
0 SLOW
0, 0
N
1
/
4000
F2
.
8
H
i 0
.
3 50
mm
–
1. 3
+
1
.
0 SLOW
0, 0
N
100
NC
_
D
F
D
S
C
_
0001
.
JP
G
15
/
10
/
2013 10
:
02
:
28
NIKON D f
1
/
12
N
OR
OR
M
AL
AL
4928x3280
1 23
5
4
6
18
19
20
27
15 16 17
25 2324 22 21
26
1413
12
10 89 711
1 Frame number/total number of
images
2 Protect status................................ 201
3 Retouch indicator ........................ 287
4 Camera name
5 Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the image
(0 192).
6 Image quality...................................55
7 Image size.........................................58
8 Image area
1
.....................................51
9 File name ....................................... 239
10 Time of recording ..................27, 276
11 Date of recording...................27, 276
12 Folder name.................................. 237
13 Metering ...........................................75
14 Exposure mode ...............................36
15 Shutter speed ........................... 39, 42
16 Aperture..................................... 41, 42
17 ISO sensitivity
2
................................70
18 Focal length ......................... 163, 322
19 Location data indicator .............. 170
20 Image comment indicator......... 278
21 Active D-Lighting......................... 110
22 Picture Control.............................. 100
23 Color space.................................... 240
24 Flash mode
3
.................................. 125
25 White balance..................................81
Color temperature ......................88
White balance fine-tuning .......84
Preset manual..............................90
26 Flash compensation
3
.................. 128
Commander mode
3
27 Exposure compensation ...............79
196
I
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images,
press the W (M) button.
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Display more images W (M)
Press W (M) to increase the
number of images displayed.
Display fewer images X (T)
Press X (T) to reduce the
number of images displayed.
When four images are displayed,
press to view highlighted image
full frame.
Highlight images
Use multi selector to highlight
images for full-frame playback,
playback zoom (0 199), deletion
(0 203), or protection (0 201).
View highlighted image J
Press J to display the highlighted
image full frame.
Delete highlighted
image
O
See page 203 for more
information.
Change protect status of
highlighted image
L (U)
See page 201 for more
information.
Return to shooting
mode
/
K
Monitor will turn off.
Photographs
can be taken immediately.
Retouch photo P
Create retouched copy of current
photograph (0 287).
W (M)
X (T)
W (M)
X (T)
197
I
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (M) button
when 72 images are displayed.
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is
in the date list or the thumbnail list:
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Toggle between date
list and thumbnail list
W (M)/J
Press W (M) or J button in date list
to place cursor in thumbnail list.
Press W (M) again to return to date
list.
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in on
highlighted photo
X (T)
• Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.
• Thumbnail list: Press and hold X
(T) button to zoom in on
highlighted picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
• Date list: Highlight date.
• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
J
Thumbnail list: View highlighted
picture.
Delete highlighted
photo(s)
O
• Date list: Delete all pictures taken on
selected date.
• Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted
picture (0 203).
Change protect
status of highlighted
photo
L (U) See page 201 for more information.
W (M)
X (T)
W (M)
X (T)
Date list
Thumbnail list
199
I
Taking a Closer Look: Playback
Zoom
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the image displayed in
full-frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in
thumbnail playback.
The following operations can be performed
while zoom is in effect:
To Use Description
Zoom in or out
X (T)/
W (M)
Press X (T) to
zoom in to
maximum of
approximately 30 ×
(large images in 36 ×
24/3 : 2 format), 23 ×
(medium images) or
15 × (small images).
Press W (M) to zoom
out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not visible in
monitor.
Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible
in monitor is indicated by yellow border.
View other
areas of image
Select faces
Faces (up to 35)
detected during
zoom are indicated
by white borders in
navigation window.
Rotate sub-
command dial to
view other faces.
200
I
View other
images
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other photos at current zoom
ratio.
Change protect
status
L (U) See page 201 for more information.
Return to
shooting mode
/
K
Monitor will turn off.
Photographs can be
taken immediately.
Retouch photo P
Create retouched copy of current
photograph (0 287).
To Use Description
201
I
Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L
(U) button can be used to protect photographs from accidental
deletion.
Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or
the Delete option in the playback menu.
Note that protected
images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 22,
272).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback Calendar playback
202
I
2 Press the L (U)
button.
The photograph will be
marked with a P icon.
To
remove protection from
the photograph so that it
can be deleted, display the
photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press
the L (U) button.
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (U) and O
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
L (U) button
203
I
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button.
To delete
multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a
selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder,
use the Delete option in the playback menu.
Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered.
Note that pictures that are
protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar
Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail or calendar playback.
2 Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback Calendar playback
(thumbnail list)
O button
204
I
3 Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button.
To exit without deleting the
photograph, press the K button.
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O
button (0 197).
A See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted
(0 233).
O button
205
I
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options.
Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Choose Selected for the
Delete option in the
playback menu.
Press the G button and
select Delete in the
playback menu.
Highlight
Selected and press 2.
2 Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture. To view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X (T)
button.
Option Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 206).
R All
Delete all pictures in the
folder currently selected for
playback (0 230).
G button
206
I
3 Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the W (M) button to
select the highlighted
picture.
Selected pictures
are marked by a O icon.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to
select additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it
and press W (M).
4 Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Ye s and
press J.
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1 Choose Select date.
In the delete menu, highlight
Select date and press 2.
W (M) button
207
I
2 Highlight a date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
date.
To view the pictures taken
on the highlighted date,
press W (M).
Use the multi
selector to scroll through
the pictures, or press and
hold X (T) to view the
current picture full screen.
Press W (M) to return to the date list.
3 Select the highlighted date.
Press 2 to select all pictures
taken on the highlighted date.
Selected dates are marked with
a M icon.
Repeat steps 2 and 3
to select additional dates; to
deselect a date, highlight it and press 2.
4 Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Ye s and
press J.
W (M) button
208
Q
Q
Connections
Install the supplied
software to display and
edit photographs and
movies that have been
copied to your computer.
Before installing
ViewNX 2, confirm that
your computer meets the
system requirements on page 210.
Be sure to use the latest
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for download from the
websites listed on page xvii, as earlier versions that do not support
the Df may fail to transfer NEF (RAW) images correctly.
1 Launch the installer.
Start the computer, insert the
ViewNX 2 installer CD, and launch
the installer.
Installing ViewNX 2
Your Imaging Toolbox
ViewNX 2
TM
209
Q
2 Select a language.
If the desired
language is not
available, click
Region Selection to
choose a different
region and then
choose the desired
language (region selection is not available in the European
release).
3 Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the on-
screen instructions.
4 Exit the installer.
5 Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
D Installation Guide
For help installing ViewNX 2, click
Installation Guide in Step 3.
Windows Mac OS
Click Ye s Click OK
A Windows
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet
connection required).
q
Select region (if required)
w
Select
language
e Click
Next
Click Install
210
Q
A System Requirements
Windows Mac OS
CPU
• Photos: Intel Celeron,
Pentium 4, or Core series,
1.6 GHz or better
• Movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or
better Pentium D; Intel Core i5
or better recommended when
viewing movies with a frame
size of 1280 × 720 or more at a
frame rate of 30 fps or above
or movies with a frame size of
1920 × 1080 or more
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or
better
• Photos: Intel Core or Xeon
series
• Movies (playback): Core Duo
2 GHz or better; Intel Core i5
or better recommended when
viewing movies with a frame
size of 1280 × 720 or more at a
frame rate of 30 fps or above
or movies with a frame size of
1920 × 1080 or more
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or
better
OS
Pre-installed versions of
Windows 8, Windows 7,
Windows Vista, and
Windows XP; note that 64-bit
versions of Windows XP are not
supported
OS X 10.8 or 10.7, Mac OS X 10.6
Memory
(RAM)
• 32-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or
Windows Vista: 1 GB or more
(2 GB or more recommended)
• 64-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or
Windows Vista: 2 GB or more
(4 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more
(2 GB or more recommended)
• OS X 10.8, 10.7: 2 GB or more
(4 GB or more recommended)
• Mac OS X 10.6: 1 GB or more (4GB
or more recommended)
Hard disk
space
A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3GB or more
recommended)
Graphics
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels
(XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels or
more recommended)
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or
more
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels
(XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels or
more recommended)
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors)
or more
See the websites listed on page xvii for the latest information on supported
operating systems.
211
Q
Using ViewNX 2
Copy Pictures to the Computer
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the
supplied ViewNX 2 CD (0 208).
1 Choose how pictures will be copied to the computer.
Choose one of the following methods:
• Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Connect the camera
to the computer using the supplied USB cable and then turn
the camera on.
• SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot,
the card can be inserted directly in the slot.
• SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately
from third-party suppliers) to the computer and insert the
memory card.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use
or use an AC adapter and power connector (available separately).
A USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
212
Q
2 Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
3 Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, all the
pictures on the memory card
will be copied to the
computer.
4 Terminate the connection.
If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera
off and disconnect the USB cable.
If you are using a card
reader or card slot, choose the appropriate option in the
computer operating system to eject the removable disk
corresponding to the memory card and then remove the card
from the card reader or card slot.
A Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and
videos, click Change
program.
A program
selection dialog will be
displayed; select Import file
using Nikon Transfer 2 and
click OK.
2 Double-click Import file.
Start Transfer
213
Q
View Pictures
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2
when transfer is complete.
❚❚ Retouching Photographs
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as
adjusting sharpness and tone levels, click the
Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
❚❚ Printing Pictures
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2
toolbar.
A dialog will be displayed, allowing
you to print pictures on a printer connected
to the computer.
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the
ViewNX 2 shortcut on the
desktop.
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon
in the Dock.
A For More Information
Consult online help for more
information on using ViewNX 2.
A Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface
cables.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Close the connector cover when the connector is not in use.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is
in progress.
214
Q
Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
(0 362) connected directly to the camera.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
3 Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub.
215
Q
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on
the current frame (0 199; press K to exit
zoom).
To view six pictures at a time, press the W (M) button.
Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X (T)
to display the highlighted picture full frame.
2 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing
options.
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional AC adapter and
power connector.
When taking photographs to be printed via direct
USB connection, set Color space to sRGB (0 240).
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
(0 55) can not be selected for printing.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 300).
A See Also
See page 351 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.
216
Q
3 Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing.
To cancel before all copies have
been printed, press J.
Option Description
Page size
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the current
printer are listed) and press J to select and exit to the
previous menu (to print at the default page size for the
current printer, select Printer default).
No.
of
copies
Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99),
then press J to select and return to the previous menu.
Border
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Print with border (print photo with white border), or No
border and press J to select and exit to the previous
menu.
Time
stamp
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Print time stamp (print times and dates of recording on
photos), or No time stamp and press J to select and exit
to the previous menu.
Cropping
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
To
exit without cropping, highlight No cropping and press J.
To crop the current picture, highlight Crop and press 2.
A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press X (T) to
increase the size of the crop, W (M) to decrease.
Position
the crop using the multi selector and press J.
Note that
print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large
sizes.
217
Q
Printing Multiple Pictures
1 Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge
playback display (see Step 3 on page
214).
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options
and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing.
• Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date.
• Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the
DPOF print order option in the playback menu (0 219).
The current print order will be displayed in Step 3.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures (0 55)
on the memory card, proceed to Step 4.
Note that if the
memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first
256 images will be printed.
G button
218
Q
3 Select pictures or choose a date.
If you chose Print select or Print
(DPOF) in Step 2, use the multi
selector to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card.
To display the current picture
full screen, press and hold the X
(T) button.
To select the
current picture for printing,
hold the W (M) button and
press 1.
The picture will be
marked with a Z icon and the
number of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the W (M) button
pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify
the number of prints (up to 99;
to deselect the picture, press 3
when the number of prints is 1).
Continue until all the desired
pictures have been selected.
If you chose Select date in Step 2,
press 1 or 3 to highlight a date
and press 2 to toggle the
highlighted date on or off.
To
view the pictures taken on the
selected date, press W (M).
Use
the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures, or press
and hold X (T) to view the
current picture full screen.
Press W (M) again to return to
the date selection dialog.
W (M) + 13: Choose number
of copies
X (T) button: View photo full
screen
X (T) button: View
highlighted photo full screen
W (M) button: View photos for
selected date
219
Q
4 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing
options.
5 Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as
described on page 216 (a warning will be displayed if the
selected page size is too small for an index print).
6 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start
printing.
To cancel before all copies have
been printed, press J.
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
devices that support DPOF.
1 Choose Select/set for
the DPOF print order
item in the playback
menu.
Press the G button and
select DPOF print order in
the playback menu.
Highlight Select/set and press 2 (to remove all photographs
from the print order, select Deselect all).
G button
220
Q
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures
on the memory card.
To
display the current picture
in full screen, press and
hold the X (T) button.
To select the current
picture for printing, hold
the W (M) button and
press 1.
The picture will
be marked with a Z icon
and the number of prints
will be set to 1.
Keeping
the W (M) button pressed,
press 1 or 3 to specify the
number of prints (up to 99;
to deselect the picture,
press 3 when the number
of prints is 1).
Continue
until all the desired
pictures have been selected.
3 Display imprint options.
Press J to display data imprint
options.
W (M) + 13: Choose number of
copies
X (T) button: View photo full
screen
221
Q
4 Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and press
2 to toggle the highlighted option on or
off (to complete the print order without
including this information, proceed to
Step 5).
• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all
pictures in print order.
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.
5 Complete the print order.
Highlight Done and press J to complete
the print order.
D DPOF Print Order
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
current order (0 217).
DPOF print date and shooting data options are
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Time stamp option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough
space on the memory card to store the print order.
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 55) can not be selected using this option.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (0 300).
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
222
Q
Viewing Photographs on TV
A type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
1 Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4 Turn the camera on and press the K
button.
During playback, images will be
displayed on the television screen.
A HDMI and Live View
HDMI displays connected via an HDMI cable can be used for live view
(0 172).
Connect to high-
definition device
(choose cable with
connector for
HDMI device)
Connect to
camera
K button
223
Q
❚❚ HDMI Options
The HDMI option in the setup menu (0
271
) controls output
resolution and can be used to enable the camera for remote
control from devices that support HDMI-CEC (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control, a standard
that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to
which they are connected).
Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the
HDMI device.
If Auto is selected, the camera
will automatically select the appropriate
format.
Device Control
If On is selected for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu
when the camera is connected to a television that supports HDMI-
CEC and both the camera and television are on, the television
remote can be used in place of the camera multi selector and J
button during full-frame playback and slide shows.
If Off is
selected, the television remote can not be used to control the
camera.
A HDMI-CEC Devices
When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear
in the control panel in place of the number of exposures remaining.
A Device Control
See the television manual for details.
A Television Playback
Use of an AC adapter and power connector (available separately) is
recommended for extended playback.
The TV will display images full
screen if photo information is hidden during full-frame playback
(0
188
).
Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are
viewed on a television screen.
224
U
U
Menu Guide
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed
below.
For information on two-button resets, see page 133.
❚❚ Playback Menu Defaults
❚❚ Shooting Menu Defaults
1
Defaults
Option Default
Playback folder (0 230) NC_DF
Image review (0 232) Off
After delete (0 233) Show next
Rotate tall (0 233) On
Slide show (0 234)
Frame interval 2 s
Option Default
File naming (0 239) DSC
Image quality (0 55) JPEG normal
Image size (0 58) Large
Image area
Choose image area (0 52) FX (36×24) 1.0×
Auto DX crop (0 52) On
JPEG compression (0 57) Size priority
NEF (RAW) recording (0 57)
Type Lossless compressed
NEF (RAW) bit depth 14-bit
225
U
1 Default settings can be restored using Shooting menu bank (0 236). With
the exceptions of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting, only
settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Shooting menu reset is not available while shooting is
in progress.
3 Applies to all banks. Start time reset to Now, interval reset to 1 minute,
number of intervals and number of shots reset to 1, and Start set to Off.
Shooting ends when reset is performed.
White balance (0 81) Auto > Normal
Fine-tuning (0 84) A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Choose color temp. (0 88) 5000 K
Preset manual (0 90) d-1
Set Picture Control (0 100) Standard
Color space (0 240) sRGB
Active D-Lighting (0 110) Off
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode (0 113) Off
Exposure differential (0 114) Auto
Smoothing (0 114) Normal
Vignette control (0 241) Normal
Auto distortion control (0 241) Off
Long exposure NR (0 242) Off
High ISO NR (0 242) Normal
Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 72) Off
Multiple exposure
2
Multiple exposure mode (0 149) Off
Number of shots (0 151) 2
Auto gain (0 152) On
Interval timer shooting (0 156) Reset
3
Option Default
226
U
❚❚ Custom Settings Menu Defaults
*
Option Default
a1 AF-C priority selection (0 246) Release
a2 AF-S priority selection (0 246) Focus
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on (0 247) 3 (Normal)
a4 AF activation (0 247) Shutter/AF-ON
a5 Focus point illumination (0 248)
AF point illumination Auto
Manual focus mode On
a6 Focus point wrap-around (0 249) No wrap
a7 Number of focus points (0 249) 39 points
b1 Center-weighted area (0 250) ø 12 mm
b2 Fine-tune optimal exposure (0 250)
Matrix metering 0
Center-weighted metering 0
Spot metering 0
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L (0 251) Off
c2 Standby timer (0 251) 6 s
c3 Self-timer (0 252)
Self-timer delay 10 s
Number of shots 1
Interval between shots 0.5 s
c4 Monitor off delay (0 253)
Playback 10 s
Menus 1 min
Information display 10 s
Image review 4 s
Live view 10 min
d1 Beep (0 253) Off
d2 Viewfinder grid display (0 253) Off
d3 ISO display (0 254) Off
227
U
d4 Screen tips (0 254) On
d5 CL mode shooting speed (0 254) 3 fps
d6 Max. continuous release (0 254) 100
d7 File number sequence (0 255) On
d8 Information display (0 256) Auto
d9 LCD illumination (0 256) Off
d10 Exposure delay mode (0 256) Off
e1 Flash sync speed (0 257) 1/200 s
e2 Flash shutter speed (0 258) 1/60 s
e3 Optional flash (0 258) TTL
e4 Exposure comp. for flash (0 259) Entire frame
e5 Modeling flash (0 259) On
e6 Auto bracketing set (0 259) AE & flash
e7 Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0 260) Flash/speed
e8 Bracketing order (0 260) MTR > under > over
f1 D button (0 261) LCD backlight (D)
f2 OK button (0 261)
Shooting mode Select center focus point
Playback mode Thumbnail on/off
Live view Select center focus point
f3 Multi selector (0 262) Do nothing
f4 Assign Fn button (0 263)
Press None
Press + command dials Choose image area
f5 Assign preview button (0 266)
Press Preview
Press + command dials None
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 267)
Press AE/AF lock
Press + command dials None
Option Default
228
U
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using Custom
settings bank (0 245).
❚❚ Setup Menu Defaults
f7 Customize command dials (0 267)
Reverse rotation No
Change main/sub Off
Aperture setting Sub-command dial
Menus and playback Off
f8 Release button to use dial (0 269) No
f9 Slot empty release lock (0 269) Enable release
f10 Reverse indicators (0 269)
f11 Easy shutter-speed shift (0 270) Off
Option Default
Monitor brightness (0 273) 0
Auto info display (0 273) Off
Clean image sensor (0 329)
Clean at startup/shutdown Clean at startup & shutdown
Flicker reduction (0 276) Auto
Time zone and date
Daylight saving time (0 276) Off
Auto image rotation (0 277) On
HDMI (0 223)
Output resolution Auto
Device control On
Location data (0 170)
Standby timer Enable
Set clock from satellite Yes
Assign remote Fn button (0 284) Same as camera Fn button
Wireless mobile adapter (0 284) Enable
Eye-Fi upload (0 285) Enable
Option Default
229
U
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D
(playback menu) tab.
The playback menu contains the following options:
G button
Option 0
Delete 205
Playback folder 230
Hide image 230
Playback display options 232
Image review 232
After delete 233
Rotate tall 233
Slide show 234
DPOF print order 219
Option 0
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 224.
230
U
Choose a folder for playback (0 185):
Hide or reveal pictures.
Hidden pictures are visible only in the
Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the
memory card.
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D playback menu
Option Description
NC_DF
Pictures in all folders created with the Df will be visible
during playback.
All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Current
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
playback.
Hide Image
G button ➜ D playback menu
Option Description
Select/set Hide or reveal selected pictures.
Select date
Selecting this option displays a list
of dates. To hide all pictures taken
on a date, highlight the date and
press 2. Selected dates are marked
by a L; to reveal all pictures taken
on a selected date, highlight it and
press 2. Press J to complete the
operation.
Deselect all Reveal all pictures.
D Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the
image.
231
U
Follow the steps below to hide or reveal selected pictures.
1 Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and press
2.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures
on the memory card (to
view the highlighted
picture full screen, press
and hold the X (T)
button) and press W (M) to select the current picture.
Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press W (M) again. Continue until all
the desired pictures have been selected.
3 Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
W (M) button
232
U
Choose the information available in
the playback photo information
display (0 188).
Press 1 or 3 to
highlight an option, then press 2 to
select the option for the photo
information display.
A L appears
next to selected items; to deselect,
highlight and press 2.
To return to
the playback menu, highlight Done
and press J.
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting.
If Off is selected, pictures can
only be displayed by pressing the K button.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D playback menu
Image Review
G button ➜ D playback menu
233
U
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback.
Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review.
After Delete
G button ➜ D playback menu
Option Description
S Show next
Display following picture.
If deleted picture was
last frame, previous picture will be displayed.
T Show previous
Display previous picture.
If deleted picture was
first frame, following picture will be displayed.
U Continue as before
If user was scrolling through pictures in order
recorded, following picture will be displayed as
described for Show next.
If user was scrolling
through pictures in reverse order, previous
picture will be displayed as described for Show
previous.
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D playback menu
Option Description
On
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated
for display in the camera monitor.
Pictures taken with Off
selected for Auto image rotation (0 277) will be displayed in
“wide” (landscape) orientation.
Off
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
234
U
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 230).
Hidden images (0 230) are not displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J.
The following
operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
The dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends.
Select Restart to restart or
Exit to return to the playback menu.
Slide Show
G button ➜ D playback menu
Option Description
Start Start slide show.
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To Press Description
Skip back/skip
ahead
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to
skip to next frame.
View additional
photo info
Change or hide photo info displayed
(0 188).
Pause/resume J Pause or resume slide show.
Exit to playback
menu
G
End slide show and return to playback
menu.
Exit to playback
mode
K End show and return to playback mode.
Exit to shooting
mode
Press shutter-release button halfway to
return to shooting mode.
235
U
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the
C (shooting menu) tab.
The shooting menu contains the following options:
G button
Option 0
Shooting menu bank 236
Storage folder 237
File naming 239
Image quality 55
Image size 58
Image area 51
JPEG compression 57
NEF (RAW) recording 57
White balance 81
Set Picture Control 100
Manage Picture Control 106
Color space 240
Active D-Lighting 110
HDR (high dynamic range) 112
Vignette control 241
Auto distortion control 241
Long exposure NR 242
High ISO NR 242
Auto ISO sensitivity control 70
Multiple exposure 149
Interval timer shooting 156
Option 0
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 224.
236
U
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks.
With the
exceptions of Multiple exposure, Interval timer shooting, and
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on
the others.
To store a particular combination of frequently-used
settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these
settings.
The new settings will be stored in the bank even when
the camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the
bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored
in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one
combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from
the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D.
A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be
added as described on page 107 by highlighting the menu bank
and pressing 2.
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the
Shooting menu bank menu
and press O.
A confirmation
dialog will be displayed;
highlight Ye s and press J to
restore default settings for the
selected bank.
See page 224 for a list of default settings.
Shooting Menu Bank
G button ➜ C shooting menu
A Shooting Menu Bank
The information display shows the current
shooting menu bank.
O button
237
U
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Selecting Folders by Folder Number
1 Choose Select folder by
number.
Highlight Select folder by
number and press 2.
The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed.
2 Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change.
If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999.
No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without choosing the storage folder, press the
G button).
If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created.
Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C shooting menu
238
U
❚❚ Selecting Folders from a List
1 Choose Select folder from
list.
Highlight Select folder from
list and press 2.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in
the selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken.
To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
239
U
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”,
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension (e.g.,
“DSC_0001.JPG”).
The File naming option is used to select three
letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name.
For
information on editing file names, see page 107.
File Naming
G button ➜ C shooting menu
A Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, and “.NDF” for dust off
reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality
settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same
file names but different extensions.
240
U
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction.
Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed
or used “as is,” with no further modification.
Adobe RGB has a
wider color gamut and is recommended for images that will be
extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera.
Color Space
G button ➜ C shooting menu
A Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file.
The sRGB
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically
used in publishing and commercial printing.
sRGB is recommended
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other
commercial print services.
Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF
compliant; applications and printers that support DCF will select the
correct color space automatically.
If the application or device does not
support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually.
An ICC color
profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color
space, allowing applications that support color management to
automatically select the correct color space.
For more information, see
the documentation provided with the application or device.
A Nikon Software
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately)
automatically select the correct color space when opening
photographs created with this camera.
241
U
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, and D lenses
(DX and PC lenses excluded).
Its effects vary from lens to lens and
are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the
viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and that
the time needed to process photographs before recording begins
may increase).
This option is available only with type G, E, and D
lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are
not guaranteed with other lenses. Before using auto distortion
control with DX lenses, select On for Auto DX crop or choose an
image area of DX (24×16) 1.5× (0 52); selecting other options
may result in heavily cropped photographs or in photographs with
severe peripheral distortion.
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
A Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect.
Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures (0 149) or DX-
format images (0 52).
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
A Retouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 305.
242
U
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The
time required for processing roughly
doubles; during processing, “lm” will
flash in the shutter speed/aperture
displays and pictures can not be taken (if the camera is turned off
before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise
reduction will not be performed).
In continuous release mode,
frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed,
the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise.”
Long Exposure NR (Long
Exposure Noise Reduction)
G button ➜ C shooting menu
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Option Description
High Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog),
particularly in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High,
Normal, and Low.
Normal
Low
Off
Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO
3200 and higher.
The amount of noise reduction is less than
the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.
244
U
The following Custom Settings are available:
Note: If settings in the current bank have been modified from default
values (0 226), an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered
settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu.
Custom Setting
0
Custom settings bank 245
a Autofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection 246
a2 AF-S priority selection 246
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on 247
a4 AF activation 247
a5 Focus point illumination 248
a6 Focus point wrap-around 249
a7 Number of focus points 249
b Metering/exposure
b1 Center-weighted area 250
b2 Fine-tune optimal exposure 250
c Timers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L 251
c2 Standby timer 251
c3 Self-timer 252
c4 Monitor off delay 253
d Shooting/display
d1 Beep 253
d2 Viewfinder grid display 253
d3 ISO display 254
d4 Screen tips 254
d5 CL mode shooting speed 254
d6 Max.
continuous release 254
d7 File number sequence 255
d8 Information display 256
d9 LCD illumination 256
d10 Exposure delay mode 256
e Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed 257
e2 Flash shutter speed 258
e3 Optional flash 258
e4 Exposure comp. for flash 259
e5 Modeling flash 259
e6 Auto bracketing set 259
e7 Auto bracketing (Mode M) 260
e8 Bracketing order 260
f Controls
f1 D button 261
f2 OK button 261
f3 Multi selector 262
f4 Assign Fn button 263
f5 Assign preview button 266
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button 267
f7 Customize command dials 267
f8 Release button to use dial 269
f9 Slot empty release lock 269
f10 Reverse indicators 269
f11 Easy shutter-speed shift 270
Custom Setting
0
245
U
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks.
Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others.
To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings.
The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D.
A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be
added as described on page 107 by highlighting the menu bank
and pressing 2.
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the Custom
settings bank menu and press
O.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Ye s and
press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank
(0 226).
Custom Settings Bank
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
A Custom Settings Bank
The information display shows the current
Custom Settings bank.
O button
246
U
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 59), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority).
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for autofocus mode.
The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
When AF-S is selected for viewfinder photography (0 59), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Focus lock
continues until the shutter is released.
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
G Release
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button
is pressed.
F Focus
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed.
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
G Release
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button
is pressed.
F Focus
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed.
247
U
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C is selected during
viewfinder photography (0 59).
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the shutter-release button and
the B button can be used to initiate autofocus.
Select AF-ON
only to prevent the camera focusing when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-
On
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
C 5 (Long)
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting the
distance to the subject.
This prevents the camera from
refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
objects passing through the frame.
( 4
D 3 (Normal)
) 2
E 1 (Short)
Off
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance
to the subject changes.
Use when photographing a series
of subjects at varying distances in quick succession.
a4: AF Activation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
248
U
The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points
are illuminated.
❚❚ AF point illumination
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the
viewfinder.
❚❚ Manual focus mode
Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus mode.
a5: Focus Point Illumination
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
Auto
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as
needed to establish contrast with the background.
On
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of
the brightness of the background.
Depending on the
brightness of the background, the selected focus point may
be difficult to see.
Off
The selected focus point is not highlighted.
The area outside
the current crop is shown in grey (0 52).
249
U
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection.
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
Wrap
Focus-point selection “wraps
around” from top to bottom,
bottom to top, right to left, and left
to right, so that, for example,
pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display
is highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus point at
the left edge of the display (w).
No wrap
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus
points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
a7: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
# 39 points
Choose from the 39 focus points shown at
right.
A 11 points
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at
right.
Use for quick focus-point selection.
q
w
250
U
When calculating exposure, center-weighted
metering assigns the greatest weight to a
circle in the center of the frame.
The diameter
(φ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12, 15, or
20 mm or to the average of the entire frame.
Note that the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non-CPU lens is
used, regardless of the setting selected for Non-CPU lens data in
the setup menu (
0 163).
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera.
Exposure can
be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of
1
/6 EV.
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b2: Fine-tune Optimal
Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank
and is not affected by two-button resets.
Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-
tuning menu.
Exposure compensation (0 79) is preferred in most
situations.
251
U
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
Choose how long the camera continues to
meter exposure when no operations are
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture
displays in the control panel and viewfinder
turn off automatically when the timer expires.
Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life.
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c2: Standby timer
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
252
U
Choose the length of the shutter release
delay, the number of shots taken, and the
interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the
shutter-release delay (0 48).
• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the
number of shots taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots: Choose the interval
between shots when the Number of shots
is more than 1.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
253
U
Choose how long the monitor remains on
when no operations are performed during
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s),
when menus (Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or
information (Information display; defaults
to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view (Live view; defaults to 10
minutes).
Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery
life.
Choose the pitch of the beep that sounds
when the camera focuses using single-servo
AF (AF-S; 0 59), when focus locks, while the
release timer is counting down in self-timer
mode (0 48), or if you attempt to take a
photograph when the memory card is locked
(0 22).
To disable the beep, choose Off. c appears in the information
display when an option other than Off is selected. Note that a
beep will not sound in quiet-shutter release mode (mode J;
0 46), regardless of the option selected.
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
reference when composing photographs (0 9).
c4: Monitor off Delay
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
254
U
If On is selected, the viewfinder will show ISO sensitivity in place of
the number of exposures remaining.
Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the
information display (0 14).
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in
CL (continuous low speed) mode (0 46;
during interval timer photography, this
setting also determines the frame advance
rate for single-frame).
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
d3: ISO Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d4: Screen Tips
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d6: Max.
Continuous Release
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
A The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d6, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills (tAA).
See page 364 for more
information on the capacity of the memory buffer.
255
U
When a photograph is taken, the camera
names the file by adding one to the last file
number used.
This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
d7: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
On
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a
new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
number in the current folder, whichever is higher.
If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
Off
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera.
Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains 999 photographs.
Reset
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a
file number by adding one to the largest file number in the
current folder.
If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to
0001.
D File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
256
U
If Auto (v) is selected, the color of the lettering in the
information display (0 11) will automatically change from black to
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose
Dark on light (w; black lettering) or Light on dark (x;white
lettering).
Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for
maximum contrast with the selected text color.
If Off is selected, the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator) will
light only when the D button is pressed.
If On is selected, the
control panel will be illuminated whenever the standby timer is
active (0 5; note that regardless of the option selected, the
backlight turns off while the shutter-release button is pressed).
Select Off for increased battery life.
In situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, select 1s, 2s, or
3s to delay shutter release until one, two, or
three seconds after the mirror is raised.
d8: Information Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Dark on light Light on dark
d9: LCD Illumination
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d10: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
257
U
This option controls flash sync speed.
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
1/250 s
(Auto FP)
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash
unit is attached (0 119).
If other flash units are used,
shutter speed is set to
1
/250 s.
When the camera shows a
shutter speed of
1
/250 s in exposure mode P or A, auto FP
high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter
speed is faster than
1
/250 s.
1/200 s
(Auto FP)
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash
unit is attached (0 119).
If other flash units are used,
shutter speed is set to
1
/200 s.
When the camera shows a
shutter speed of
1
/200 s in exposure mode P or A, auto FP
high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter
speed is faster than
1
/200 s.
1/200 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync
speed limit in exposure mode S or M,
rotate the shutter-speed dial to X.
An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and
control panel.
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright
sunlight.
The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”
when auto FP high-speed sync is active (0 123).
258
U
This option determines the slowest shutter
speed available when using front- or rear-
curtain sync or red-eye reduction in exposure
mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen,
shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in S and
M modes or at flash settings of slow sync, slow
rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync).
Options
range from
1
/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).
Choose a flash control mode for optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash
units.
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e3: Optional Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
1 TTL
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions (0 124).
2 Manual Choose a flash level.
Monitor pre-flashes are not emitted.
A Flash Control Mode
The flash control mode is shown in the
information display (0 11, 123).
259
U
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
If On is selected when the camera is being used with an optional
flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system
(0 118), a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera Pv
button is pressed (0 41).
No modeling flash is emitted if Off is
selected.
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
(0 136) is in effect.
Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing,
WB bracketing (m) to perform white-balance bracketing (0 141),
or ADL bracketing (y) to perform bracketing using Active D-
Lighting (0 145).
Note that white balance bracketing is not
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) +
JPEG.
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
YE Entire frame
Both flash level and exposure compensation are
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire
frame.
E Background only
Exposure compensation applies to background
only.
e5: Modeling Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e6: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
260
U
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e6 in manual
exposure mode.
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control.
If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless
of the setting selected for auto ISO sensitivity control (0 72).
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure, flash,
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order
described on pages 137 and 141.
If Under > MTR > over (I) is
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the
highest value.
This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
F
Flash/speed
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e6
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(Custom Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
G
Flash/speed/
aperture
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Setting e6 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e6 set to
AE & flash).
H
Flash/aperture
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e6 set to
AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
I
Flash only
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e6
set to AE & flash).
e8: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
261
U
Choose the role played by the D button: turning the control panel
backlight on or off (D LCD backlight (D) on/off) or turning the
control panel and information display on or off (DR D and
information display on/off).
This option determines the role assigned to the J button during
viewfinder photography, playback, and live view.
❚❚ Shooting Mode
❚❚ Playback Mode
f: Controls
f1: D Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f2: OK Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Role assigned to J button
J
Select center focus point Select the center focus point.
K
Highlight active focus point Highlight the active focus point.
Not used None.
Option Role assigned to J button
Q
Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
R
View histograms
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
a histogram is displayed (0 192) while the J
button is pressed.
S
Zoom on/off
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom.
Choose the initial zoom setting
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,
and High magnification.
The zoom display will
center on the active focus point (if the picture was
taken in viewfinder photography) or on the center
of the image (if the picture was taken during live
view).
T
Choose folder Display a folder selection dialog.
262
U
❚❚ Live View
If Restart standby timer is selected, operating the multi selector
when the standby timer expires (0 33) will activate the meters
and start the standby timer.
If Do nothing is selected, the timer
will not start when the multi selector is pressed.
Option Role assigned to J button
J
Select center
focus point
Pressing the J button in live view selects the center
focus point.
S
Zoom on/off
Press the J button to toggle zoom on and off.
Choose the initial zoom setting from Low
magnification, Medium magnification, and High
magnification. The zoom display will center on the
active focus point.
Not used Pressing the J button has no effect in live view.
f3: Multi Selector
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
263
U
Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials (Press
+ command dials).
❚❚ Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
f4: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Option Description
q
Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (0 41).
r FV lock
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (supported
flash units only, 0 118).
Press again to cancel FV lock
(0 130).
B AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is
pressed.
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
D
AE lock (Reset
on release)
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
E AE lock (Hold)
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.
A AF-ON Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.
s Flash off
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn
button is pressed.
264
U
t
Bracketing
burst
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current
bracketing program will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
If white balance
bracketing is active or continuous release mode
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the
bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is
held down.
e +NEF (RAW)
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the control
panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with
the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed
(to record NEF/RAW copies with a series of
photographs, keep the shutter-release button
pressed halfway between shots). To exit without
recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button
again.
L
Matrix
metering
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
M
Center-
weighted
metering
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
button is pressed.
N Spot metering
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
9
Viewfinder
grid display
Press the Fn button to turn the framing grid display in
the viewfinder on or off (0 9).
m
Viewfinder
virtual horizon
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in
the viewfinder (0 265).
n MY MENU Pressing the Fn button displays “MY MENU” (0 313).
6
Access top
item in MY
MENU
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
Option Description
265
U
K Playback
Fn button performs same function as K button.
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the K
button with your left hand.
None Pressing the button has no effect.
A Incompatible Options
If the option selected for Press can not be used in combination with the
option selected for Press + command dials, a message will be
displayed and whichever of Press or Press + command dials was
selected first will be set to None.
A Viewfinder Virtual Horizon
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f4
(Assign Fn button) > Press, pressing the Fn button converts the
exposure indicator in the viewfinder to a roll display. Press the button
again to restore the indicator to its normal function.
Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left
Viewfinder
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back.
For a display that shows both pitch and
roll, use the Virtual horizon option in the setup menu (0 282).
Option Description
266
U
❚❚ Press + command dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:
Choose the role played by the Pv button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).
The options
available are the same as for Assign Fn
button (0 263).
The default options for
Press and Press + command dials are Preview (0 41) and None,
respectively.
Option Description
5
Choose
image area
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate a command
dial to choose an image area (0 51).
w
Choose non-
CPU lens
number
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate a command
dial to choose a lens number specified using the Non-
CPU lens data option (0 163).
y
Active
D-Lighting
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate a command
dial to adjust Active D-Lighting (0 110).
U
HDR (high
dynamic
range)
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the main
command dial to choose an HDR mode, the sub-
command dial to choose Exposure differential
(0 112).
V
Auto ISO
sensitivity
control
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate a command
dial to turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off
(0 72).
W
Multiple
exposure
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the main
command dial to choose the multiple exposure
mode; press the Fn button and rotate the sub-
command dial to choose the number of exposures
(0 149).
None
No operation is performed when the command dials
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.
f5: Assign Preview Button
G button A Custom Settings menu
267
U
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L
button, either alone (Press) or in combination
with the command dials (Press + command
dials). The options available are the same as
for Assign Fn button (0 263), except that
HDR (high dynamic range) and Multiple
exposure are not available for Press + command dials. The
default options for Press and Press + command dials are AE/AF
lock and None, respectively.
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
• Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of rotation of the command
dials.
• Change main/sub: If Off is selected, the main
command dial controls shutter speed and
the sub-command dial controls aperture. If
On is selected, the main command dial will
control aperture and the sub-command dial
shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is selected,
the main command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure
mode A only.
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button A Custom Settings menu
f7: Customize Command Dials
G button A Custom Settings menu
268
U
• Aperture setting: If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can
only be adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub).
If
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show
aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G and E lenses
is still set using the sub-command dial).
Note that regardless of
the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
• Menus and playback: If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to
choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback,
highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus.
If On or On (image
review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be
used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback,
move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback, and
move the menu highlight bar up or down.
The sub-command
dial is used to display additional photo information in full-frame
playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail
playback.
Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the
command dials from being used for playback during image
review.
While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-command
dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected option, while
rotating it left displays the previous menu.
To make a selection,
press 2 or J.
269
U
Selecting Ye s allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding the W (M), X (T), L (U), AF-mode, or D button
and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released (this also applies to the
Fn, Pv, and A AE-L/AF-L buttons if they have been assigned a “+
command dials” function other than Choose image area, Choose
non-CPU lens number, or Auto ISO sensitivity control using
Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button, f5, Assign preview button,
or f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button). Setting ends when any of the
affected buttons is pressed again, the standby timer expires, or the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode).
If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
If (W) is selected, the exposure indicators in the
viewfinder and information display are displayed with negative
values on the left and positive values on the right.
Select
(V) to display positive values on the left and
negative values on the right.
f8: Release Button to Use Dial
G button A Custom Settings menu
f9: Slot Empty Release Lock
G button A Custom Settings menu
f10: Reverse Indicators
G button A Custom Settings menu
270
U
If On is selected, the main command dial can be used to adjust the
shutter speed selected with the shutter-speed dial by ±
2
/3 EV in
increments of
1
/3 EV. If the shutter speed dial is set to 4 (4 s, labelled
in red), the main command dial can be used to select shutter
speeds as slow as 30 s.
f11: Easy Shutter-Speed Shift
G button A Custom Settings menu
271
U
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
The setup menu contains the following options:
1 Not available when battery is low.
2 Only displayed when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 285).
G button
Option 0
Format memory card 272
Monitor brightness 273
Auto info display 273
Clean image sensor 329
Lock mirror up for cleaning
1
331
Image Dust Off ref photo 274
Flicker reduction 276
Time zone and date 276
Language 277
Auto image rotation 277
Image comment 278
Copyright information 279
Save/load settings 280
Virtual horizon 282
Non-CPU lens data 163
AF fine-tune 283
HDMI 223
Location data 170
Assign remote Fn button 284
Wireless mobile adapter 284
Eye-Fi upload
2
285
Firmware version 286
Option 0
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 228.
272
U
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
formatted in other devices.
Format the card as described below.
1 Highlight Ye s .
To exit without formatting the
memory card, highlight No and
press J.
2 Press J.
Press J to begin formatting.
Do not
remove the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until
formatting is complete.
Format Memory Card
G button B setup menu
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
computer before proceeding (0 211).
273
U
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness
for playback, menus, and the information
display.
Choose higher values for increased
brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
If Auto info display is selected, shooting information will
automatically be displayed in the monitor when the shutter-
release button returns to its starting position after being pressed
halfway.
Monitor Brightness
G button B setup menu
A See Also
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see
page 179.
Auto Info Display
G button B setup menu
274
U
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera.
A non-DX lens with a focal length of at
least 50 mm is recommended.
When using a zoom lens, zoom all
the way in.
1 Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
To exit
without acquiring image dust
off data, press G.
• Start: The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor before
starting.
The message shown at right
will be displayed and “rEF” will appear
in the viewfinder and control panel
displays when cleaning is complete.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button B setup menu
275
U
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
Note that noise
reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,
increasing recording times.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed.
Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
step 1.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed.
Select Clean sensor and then start only if the
dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures.
Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software.
A
grid pattern is displayed when reference images
are viewed on the camera.
276
U
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during live view.
Choose Auto to allow the
camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or
manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power
supply.
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off (0 27).
Flicker Reduction
G button B setup menu
A Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results.
Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in
which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-
number).
Time Zone and Date
G button B setup menu
Option Description
Time zone
Choose a time zone.
The camera clock is automatically
set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time
Set the camera clock.
If the clock is not set, a flashing
Y icon will appear in the information display.
Date format
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
displayed.
Daylight saving
time
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
The camera clock
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
The default setting is Off.
277
U
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback (0 187) or when viewed in ViewNX 2 (supplied)
or in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 325).
The following
orientations are recorded:
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.
Choose
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens
pointing up or down.
Language
G button B setup menu
Auto Image Rotation
G button B setup menu
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
A Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
playback menu (0 233).
278
U
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 325).
The comment is also
visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
(0 193).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 107.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs.
Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2.
Image Comment
G button B setup menu
279
U
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in
the photo information display (0 193) and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 325).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 107.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 107.
Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to all
subsequent photographs.
Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
Copyright Information
G button B setup menu
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person.
Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright
information option.
280
U
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card (if the card is full, an error will be displayed).
Use this option
to share settings among Df cameras.
Save/Load Settings
G button B setup menu
Menu Option
Playback
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Shooting
(all banks)
Shooting menu bank
File naming
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance (with fine-tuning and presets d-1–d-4)
Set Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Auto ISO sensitivity control
281
U
Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by
selecting Load settings.
Note that Save/load settings is only
available when a memory card is inserted in the camera, and that
the Load settings option is only available if the card contains
saved settings.
Custom settings
(all banks)
All Custom Settings
Setup
Auto info display
Clean image sensor
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)
Language
Auto image rotation
Image comment
Copyright information
Non-CPU lens data
HDMI
Location data
Assign remote Fn button
Wireless mobile adapter
Eye-Fi upload
My Menu/
Recent Settings
All My Menu items
All recent settings
Choose tab
A Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUPD.
The camera will not be
able to load settings if the file name is changed.
Menu Option
282
U
Display roll and pitch information based on information from the
camera tilt sensor.
If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the
roll reference line will turn green, while if the camera is tilted
neither forward nor back, the dot in the center of the display will
turn green.
Each division is equivalent to 5°.
Virtual Horizon
G button B setup menu
Camera level Camera tilted left or
right
Camera tilted
forward or back
D Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.
A See Also
For information on viewing a roll indicator in the viewfinder, see Custom
Setting f4 (Assign Fn button; 0 263, 265).
For information on
displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see page 182.
283
U
Fine-tune focus for up to 12 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
AF Fine-tune
G button B setup menu
Option Description
AF fine-tune
(On/Off )
• On: Turn AF tuning on.
• Off: Turn AF tuning off.
Saved value
Tune AF for the current lens
(CPU lenses only). Press 1 or 3
to choose a value between +20
and –20. Values for up to 12
lens types can be stored. Only
one value can be stored for
each type of lens.
Default
Choose the AF tuning value
used when no previously saved
value exists for the current lens
(CPU lenses only).
List saved
values
List previously saved AF tuning values.
To delete a lens
from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O.
To
change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an
identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens
serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the
same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used
with only one lens of each type), highlight the desired lens
and press 2.
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose
an identifier and press J to save
changes and exit.
Move focal
point away
from camera.
Current
value
Move focal
point toward
camera.
Previous
value
284
U
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on
optional WR-1 and WR-T10 (0 325) wireless
remote controllers.
Choose whether the camera will establish wireless connections
with smart devices when an optional WU-1a wireless mobile
adapter (0 324) is attached to the camera USB connector.
D AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity
when AF tuning is applied.
D Live View
Tuning is not applied to autofocus during live view.
A Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.
If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.
Assign Remote Fn Button
G button B setup menu
Wireless Mobile Adapter
G button B setup menu
Option Description
Enable
Enable wireless connections to smart devices running the
Wireless Mobile Utility.
Disable
Disable wireless connections to smart devices.
Choose this
option in locations where the use of wireless devices is
prohibited.
Selecting this option also reduces the drain on
the camera battery.
285
U
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the
camera.
Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected
destination.
Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is
indicated by an icon in the information
display:
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures
available for upload.
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card.
If a flashing
W appears in the control panel or viewfinder, refer to
page 349; if this indicator is not flashing, pictures can be taken
normally but you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.
Eye-Fi Upload
G button B setup menu
286
U
View the current camera firmware version.
D Eye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected.
If a
warning is displayed in the monitor (0 349), turn the camera off and
remove the card.
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries
to the manufacturer.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult
the manufacturer for more information.
Eye-Fi cards are for use only in
the country of purchase.
Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been
updated to the latest version.
A Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards
that support ad hoc mode.
Set Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer,
0 251) to 30 s or longer.
Firmware Version
G button B setup menu
287
U
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch
menu) tab.
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures.
The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2Only available if P is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image
or original is displayed.
G button
Option 0
i D-Lighting 291
j Red-eye correction 292
k Trim 293
l Monochrome 294
m Filter effects 295
n Color balance 296
o Image overlay
1
297
7 NEF (RAW) processing 300
8 Resize 302
& Quick retouch 304
e Straighten 304
( Distortion control 305
) Fisheye 305
f Color outline 306
g Color sketch 306
h Perspective control 307
i Miniature effect 308
u Selective color 309
p Side-by-side comparison
2
311
Option 0
288
U
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although (with the exception of Image overlay) each option
can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of
detail).
Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed
out and unavailable.
A Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are
the same size and quality as the original, while copies created from NEF
(RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies
created from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of
the same size as the original.
Size-priority compression is used when
copies are saved in JPEG format.
289
U
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
item, 2 to select.
2 Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press
J
.
To view the highlighted
picture full screen, press and
hold the X (T) button.
3 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for
the selected item.
To exit without
creating a retouched copy, press G.
A Retouch
In the case of images recorded at image quality settings of NEF +
JPEG (0 56), only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. The
camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with
other devices.
A Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no
actions are performed for a brief period.
Any unsaved changes will
be lost.
To increase the time the monitor remains on, choose a
longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay; 0 253).
290
U
4 Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched
copy.
Retouched copies are
indicated by a o icon.
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.
Display picture full
frame and press P.
Highlight an option
and press J.
Create retouched
copy.
291
U
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
correction performed.
The effect can be
previewed in the edit display.
Press J to
copy the photograph.
D-Lighting
G button N retouch menu
Before After
292
U
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is
available only with photographs taken using the flash.
The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display.
Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table.
Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview
thoroughly before proceeding.
Red-Eye Correction
G button N retouch menu
To Use Description
Zoom in X (T)
Press X (T) to zoom in, W (M) to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector to
view areas of image not visible in monitor.
Keep
multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other
areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed
when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed;
area currently visible in monitor is indicated by
yellow border.
Press J to cancel zoom.
Zoom out W (M)
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom J
Create copy J
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected
photograph, a copy will be created that has
been processed to reduce its effects.
No copy
will be created if the camera is unable to detect
red-eye.
293
U
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph.
The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
Trim
G button N retouch menu
To Use Description
Reduce size of
crop
W (M)Press W (M) to reduce the size of the crop.
Increase size of
crop
X (T)Press X (T) to increase the size of the crop.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the main command dial to switch
between aspect ratios of 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 1:1,
and 16 : 9.
Position crop
Use multi selector to position the crop.
Press
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the
desired position.
Create copy J Save the current crop as a separate file.
A Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) +
JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an image
quality (0 55) of JPEG fine; cropped copies
created from JPEG photos have the same image
quality as the original.
The size of the copy
varies with crop size and aspect ratio and
appears at upper left in the crop display.
A Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
294
U
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease.
Press J
to create a monochrome copy.
Monochrome
G button N retouch menu
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
295
U
Choose from the following filter effects.
After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Filter Effects
G button N retouch menu
Option Description
Skylight
Creates the effect of a skylight filter,
making the picture less blue.
The
effect can be previewed in the
monitor as shown at right.
Warm filter
Creates a copy with warm tone filter
effects, giving the copy a “warm” red
cast.
The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.
Red
intensifier
Intensify reds (Red intensifier),
greens (Green intensifier), or blues
(Blue intensifier).
Press 1 to increase
the effect, 3 to decrease.
Green
intensifier
Blue
intensifier
Cross screen
Add starburst effects to light sources.
• Number of points: Choose from four,
six, or eight.
• Filter amount: Choose the brightness
of the light sources affected.
• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the
points.
• Length of points: Choose the length of points.
• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter.
Press X (T) to
preview the copy full frame.
• Save: Create a retouched copy.
Soft
Add a soft filter effect.
Press 1 or 3
to choose the filter strength.
296
U
Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below.
The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
with red, green, and blue histograms (0 192)
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.
Color Balance
G button N retouch menu
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of blue
Create retouched copy
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the
monitor, press X (T).
The histogram will be
updated to show data only for the portion of the
image displayed in the monitor.
While the image
is zoomed in, press L (U) to toggle back and
forth between color balance and zoom.
When
zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with
the X (T) and W (M) and scroll the image with the multi selector.
297
U
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging
application.
The new picture is saved at current image quality and
size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size
(0 55, 58; all options are available).
To create a NEF (RAW) copy,
choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed, with Image 1
highlighted; press J to display
a list of the NEF pictures created
with this camera.
Image Overlay
G button N retouch menu
+
298
U
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to
highlight the first photograph
in the overlay.
To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X
(T) button.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph
and return to the preview display.
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1.
Highlight Image 2
and press J, then
select the second photo as described in
Step 2.
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2
and optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select gain from values
between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for
the second image.
The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve
gain or 2.0 to double it.
The effects are visible in the Preview
column.
5 Preview the overlay.
Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor
in the Preview column and
press 1 or 3 to highlight
Overlay. Press J to preview
the overlay as shown at right (to
save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save).
To
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W (M).
299
U
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an overlay is created, the
resulting image will be
displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth
can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation), and values for
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for
Image 1.
The current image comment is appended to the overlay when
it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied.
Overlays
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the
NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the
original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority
compression.
300
U
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1 Select NEF (RAW)
processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW)
processing in the retouch
menu and press 2 to display a
picture selection dialog listing
only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2 Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X (T) button).
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button N retouch menu
301
U
3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below.
Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and
+2 EV.
The Picture Control grid is not displayed when Picture
Controls are adjusted.
4 Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to
create a JPEG copy of the
selected photograph (to exit
without copying the
photograph, press the G
button).
Image quality (0 55)
Image size (0 58)
White balance (0 81)
Exposure compensation (0 79)
Set Picture Control (0 100)
High ISO NR (0 242)
Color space (0 240)
Vignette control (0 241)
D-Lighting (0 291)
302
U
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1 Select Resize.
To resize selected images, press
G to display the menus and
select Resize in the retouch
menu.
2 Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and
press 2.
The options shown at right will
be displayed; highlight an
option and press J.
Resize
G button N retouch menu
303
U
3 Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed; highlight pictures
using the multi selector and
press the W (M) button to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X (T) button).
Selected pictures are
marked by a 8 icon.
Press J when the selection is complete.
4 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Highlight Ye s and press J to save the
resized copies.
A Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
A Image Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (0 55) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG
photos have the same image quality as the original.
304
U
Create copies with enhanced saturation and
contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as required to
brighten dark or backlit subjects.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
enhancement.
The effect can be previewed
in the edit display.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Create a straightened copy of the selected
image.
Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise
by up to five degrees in increments of
approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it
counterclockwise (the effect can be
previewed in the edit display; note that edges
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy).
Press J to
copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.
Quick Retouch
G button N retouch menu
Straighten
G button N retouch menu
305
U
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion.
Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
page 241).
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-
cushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display;
note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of
the edges being cropped out).
Press J to copy the photograph,
or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
Note that
distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies
created from photographs taken with DX lenses at an image area
setting of FX (36×24) 1.0×.
Create copies that appear to have been taken
with a fisheye lens.
Press 2 to increase the
effect (this also increases the amount of that
will be cropped out at the edges of the
image), 4 to reduce it.
The effect can be
previewed in the edit display.
Press J to
copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.
Distortion Control
G button N retouch menu
A Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC,
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded).
Results are not guaranteed
with other lenses.
Fisheye
G button N retouch menu
306
U
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use
as a base for painting.
The effect can be
previewed in the edit display.
Press J to
copy the photograph.
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles
a sketch made with colored pencils.
Press 1
or 3 to highlight Vividness or Outlines and
press 4 or 2 to change.
Vividness can be
increased to make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic
effect, while outlines can be made thicker or thinner.
Thicker
outlines makes colors more saturated.
The results can be
previewed in the edit display.
Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
Color Outline
G button N retouch menu
Before After
Color Sketch
G button N retouch menu
307
U
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object.
Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out).
The results can be
previewed in the edit display.
Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
Perspective Control
G button N retouch menu
Before After
308
U
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama.
Works best
with photos taken from a high vantage point.
The area that will be
in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.
Miniature Effect
G button N retouch menu
To Press Description
Choose
orientation
W (M)
Press W (M) to choose orientation of area that
is in focus.
Choose position
If area of effect is in
wide orientation, press
1 or 3 to position
frame showing area of
copy that will be in
focus.
If area of effect is in tall
orientation, press 4 or
2 to position frame
showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
Choose size
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4
or 2 to choose height.
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or
3 to choose width.
Preview copy X (T) Preview copy.
Cancel K Exit to playback without creating copy.
Create copy J Create copy.
Area in focus
309
U
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1 Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the
retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection
dialog.
2 Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X(T) button).
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.
3 Select a color.
Use the multi selector to
position the cursor over an
object and press the A AE-
L/AF-L button to select the
color of the object as one
that will remain in the final
copy (the camera may have
difficulty detecting unsaturated colors; choose a saturated
color).
To zoom in on the picture for precise color selection,
press X (T).
Press W (M) to zoom out.
Selective Color
G button N retouch menu
Selected color
A AE-L/AF-L button
310
U
4 Highlight the color range.
Rotate the main command dial
to highlight the color range for
the selected color.
5 Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or
decrease the range of similar
hues that will be included in the
final photograph.
Choose from
values between 1 and 7; note
that higher values may include hues from other colors.
The
effect can be previewed in the edit display.
6 Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the main command dial
to highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top of
the display and repeat Steps 3–
5 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color if desired.
To
deselect the highlighted color, press O, or press and hold O to
remove all colors.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
select Ye s .
7 Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
Color range
311
U
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
This
option is only available if P button is pressed to display the
retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame.
1 Select a picture.
In full-frame playback,
select a retouched copy
(shown by a o icon) or a
photograph that has been
retouched and press P.
2 Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press J.
Side-by-side Comparison
P button
312
U
3 Compare the copy with the
original.
The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed at
the top of the display.
Press 4
or 2 to switch between the
source image and the
retouched copy.
To view the
highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X (T)
button.
If the copy was created from two source images using
Image overlay, or if the source has been copied multiple
times, press 1 or 3 to view the other source images or copies.
To exit to playback mode, press the K button, or press J to
exit to playback with the highlighted image selected.
D Side-by-side Comparisons
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected (0 201), has since been deleted or
hidden (0 230).
Options used to
create copy
Source
image
Retouched
copy
313
U
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
The MY MENU option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items).
If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
(0 317).
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described on the
following pages.
G button
314
U
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu
item and press J.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.
5 Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My Menu
are indicated by a check mark.
Items
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional
items.
315
U
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to
select or deselect.
Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.
3 Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
4 Delete the selected items.
Press J to delete the selected
items.
A Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O
button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
316
U
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to
move and press J.
3 Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item
up or down in My Menu and
press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
4 Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to
return to My Menu.
G button
317
U
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select
m RECENT SETTINGS for O MY MENU > Choose tab.
1 Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select
m
RECENT SETTINGS
.
Highlight m RECENT SETTINGS
and press J.
The name of the
menu will change from “MY
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used.
To view My Menu again, select O MY MENU for
m RECENT SETTINGS > Choose tab.
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press
the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
delete the selected item.
318
n
n
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
3 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 75).
4 Observe due caution when tilting or shifting PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED
lenses, as they may contact the camera body and cause damage or injury.
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Focus mode
Exposure
mode
Metering system
Lens/accessory
AF
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
M
P
S
A
M
L
M
N
3D Color
CPU lenses
1
Type G, E, or D AF NIKKOR
2
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
—
3
PC-E NIKKOR series
4
—
5
5
5
5
—
3, 5
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D
6
—
5
—
7
—
3, 5
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter
8
—
3
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses
for F3AF)
9
9
—
3
AI-P NIKKOR —
10
—
3
Non-CPU lenses
11
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR or
Nikon Series E lenses
12
—
10
—
13
—
14
15
Non-AI lenses —
10
—
16
—
16
15
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 — —
17
———
Reflex-NIKKOR — — —
13
——
15
PC-NIKKOR —
5
—
18
——
AI-type Teleconverter
19
—
20
—
13
—
14
15
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment
21
—
20
—
22
——
Auto extension rings (PK-series
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
—
20
—
13
——
319
n
6 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than
the maximum aperture is used.
7 Manual exposure mode only.
8 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 321). For information on the
focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 321.
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus.
Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
11 Some lenses can not be used (see page 320).
12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera
body.
Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on
camera.
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 163), aperture
value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
Non-CPU lens data (0 163).
Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired
results are not achieved.
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
Non-CPU lens data (0 163).
16 Can be used only if Non-CPU lens data (0 163) has been used to specify lens
focal length and maximum aperture and to set exposure meter coupling to
Non-AI lens (0 167). Match camera aperture setting to value selected with lens
aperture ring.
17 Can be used in manual exposure mode at shutter speeds slower than flash sync
speed by one step or more.
18 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture.
In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock and shifting lens.
In
manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
19 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.
See
teleconverter manual for details.
20 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
21 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring.
PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
22 Use preset aperture.
In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking
photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO
sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.
320
n
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note
that IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by
the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the
lens barrel.
Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture
ring.
CPU contacts Aperture ring
CPU lens Type G/E lens Type D lens
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can
NOT be used with the Df:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
•
Lenses that require the AU-1
focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm
f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF
Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• NIKKOR-H Auto 2.8cm/3.5 (28mm/
3.5) lenses with serial numbers
below 362000
• NIKKOR-S Auto 3.5cm/2.8 (35mm/
2.8) lenses with serial numbers
below 928000
• NIKKOR-S Auto 5cm/2 (50mm/2)
• NIKKOR-Q Auto 13.5cm/3.5
(135mm/3.5) lenses with serial
numbers below 753000
• Micro-NIKKOR 5.5cm/3.5
• Medical-NIKKOR Auto 200mm/f5.6
• Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom 85–
250mm/f4–4.5
• Auto NIKKOR Telephoto-Zoom
200–600mm/f9.5–10.5
Depending on their condition, individual lenses of other types may not be
suitable for use. Do not attempt to forcibly attach a lens that does not mate
smoothly with the camera mount.
321
n
A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters
The table below shows the focus points available for autofocus and
electronic rangefinding when an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is attached.
Note that the camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast
subjects if the combined aperture is slower than f/5.6. Autofocus is not
available when teleconverters are used with the AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor
105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.
1 Focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are obtained
from line sensors.
2 Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode (0 62).
3 Autofocus not available.
Accessory
Maximum
aperture of
lens
Focus points
TC-14E,
TC-14E II
f/4 or
faster
f/5.6
TC-17E II
f/2.8 or
faster
f/4
f/5.6
—
1
2
3
TC-20E,
TC-20E II,
TC-20E III
f/2.8 or
faster
f/4
f/5.6
—
TC-800-
1.25E ED
f/5.6
Accessory
Maximum
aperture of
lens
Focus points
1
3
2
322
n
A Calculating Angle of View
The Df can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras.
If
Auto DX crop is on (0 52) and a 35mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35mm film (36.0 ×
23.9 mm); if a DX lens is attached, the angle of view will automatically be
adjusted to 23.4 × 15.5 mm (DX format).
If a 35 mm format lens is attached, the angle of view can be reduced by
1.5 × by turning Auto DX crop off and selecting DX (24×16).
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35mm
format angle of view.
To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm
format when DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the
lens by about 1.5 (for example, the effective focal length of a 50mm lens
in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is selected).
FX (36×24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,
equivalent to 35mm format camera)
Lens
Picture diagonal
DX (24×16) picture size (23.4 × 15.5 mm,
equivalent to DX format camera)
Angle of view (FX (36×24); 35mm format)
Angle of view (DX (24×16); DX format)
323
n
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the Df.
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for
the latest information.
Power
sources
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (0 18, 19): EN-EL14
batteries can also be used. Additional EN-EL14a batteries
are available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized
service representatives.
• Battery Charger MH-24 (0 18): Recharge EN-EL14a and
EN-EL14 batteries.
• Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can
be used to power the camera for extended periods (EH-5a
and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used).
The EP-5A is
required to connect the camera to the EH-5b; see page 326
for details.
Cable
releases
Cable Release AR-3: Attaches to the release socket to help
prevent camera shake in close ups or under low light.
Filters
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The Df can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use
C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52,
O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.
324
n
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
• Rubber Eyecup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m
–1
.
Use
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not
be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment control
(–3 to +1 m
–1
).
Test diopter adjustment lenses before
purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater
precision when framing.
• Eyepiece Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene at the
center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus.
DK-18
eyepiece adapter (available separately) required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching the
DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing attachment to
the Df.
• Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14/Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-17A: These
viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold
conditions.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing
Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the viewfinder
eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in the
viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in
the horizontal shooting position. The DR-5 supports
diopter adjustment and can also magnify the view through
the viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when framing
(note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when
the view is magnified).
Body cap
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror,
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a
lens is not in place.
Wireless
mobile
adapters
Wireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a: Supports two-way
communication between the camera and smart devices
running the Wireless Mobile Utility app. Use the Wireless
Mobile Utility to take pictures remotely or download existing
pictures to the smart device.
325
n
Software
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such
advanced editing features as selection control points and
an auto retouch brush.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer to take photos and save them directly to the
computer hard disk. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to
capture photographs directly to the computer, a PC
connection indicator c will appear in the control panel.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the
websites listed on page xvii for the latest information on
supported operating systems. At default settings, Nikon
Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to
Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an
account on the computer and the computer is connected to
the Internet. A message is automatically displayed when an
update is found.
Wireless
remote
controllers
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10
wireless remote controller is attached to the camera
accessory terminal, the camera can be controlled wirelessly
using a WR-T10 wireless remote controller.
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-1: WR-1 units are used in groups
of two or more, with one functioning as a transmitter and
the remaining units acting receivers. The receivers are
attached to the accessory terminals of one or more
cameras, allowing the transmitter to be used to release the
camera shutters or adjust settings remotely.
Accessory
terminal
accessories
The Df is equipped with an
accessory terminal for MC-DC2
remote cords (0 44) and GP-1 and
GP-1A GPS units (0 170), which
connect with the 4 mark on the
connector aligned with the 2 next
to the accessory terminal (close
the camera connector cover when the terminal is not in use).
326
n
Attaching a Power Connector and AC
Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector
and AC adapter.
1 Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber/
memory card slot (q) and
power connector (w) covers.
2 Insert the EP-5A power
connector.
Be sure to insert the connector
in the orientation shown, using
the connector to keep the
battery latch pressed to one
side.
The latch locks the
connector in place when the
connector is fully inserted.
3 Close the battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover.
Position the power connector
cable so that it passes through
the power connector slot and
close the battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover.
327
n
4 Connect the EH-5b AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC
adapter (q) and the EP-5A power cable to the DC socket (w).
A V icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is
powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
328
n
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
the battery and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place.
To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Camera body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with
a soft, dry cloth.
After using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened
in distilled water and dry thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other
foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not
covered under warranty.
Lens, mirror,
and
viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged.
Remove dust and
lint with a blower.
If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid.
To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower.
When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
329
n
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré.
If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu.
The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option,
or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1 Select Clean image
sensor in the setup
menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Clean image
sensor in the setup menu
and press 2.
2 Select Clean now.
The camera will check the
image sensor and then begin
cleaning. During cleaning,
P flashes in the control
panel and other operations can
not be performed.
Do not
remove or disconnect the
power source until cleaning is
complete and P is no
longer displayed.
G button
330
n
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
1 Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and press
J.
Option Description
5 Clean at startup
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each
time the camera is turned on.
6 Clean at shutdown
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
7
Clean at startup &
shutdown
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
startup and at shutdown.
Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
A Place the Camera Base Down
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when
the camera is placed base down as shown at
right.
331
n
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu (0 329), the
filter can be cleaned manually as described below.
Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged.
Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter.
Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and
power connector.
The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is
only available in the setup menu at battery levels over H.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter.
If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu,
clean the image sensor manually or consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry.
Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
332
n
3 Select Lock mirror up
for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and
press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Lock mirror up
for cleaning in the setup
menu and press 2.
4 Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the control panel
and viewfinder.
To restore normal
operation without inspecting the low-
pass filter, turn the camera off.
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open, revealing the low-pass filter.
The
display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in
the control panel will flash.
G button
333
n
6 Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 8.
7 Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower.
Do not use a blower-
brush, as the bristles could damage the
filter.
Dirt that can not be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikon-
authorized service personnel.
Under no circumstances should
you touch or wipe the filter.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged.
If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically.
To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes.
End cleaning
or inspection immediately.
334
n
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping.
The Df, however, is designed to be used with interchangeable
lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are
removed or exchanged.
Once inside the camera, this foreign matter
may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs
taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is
in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera,
being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may
be adhering to the body cap.
Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty
environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the
filter as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon
service personnel.
Photographs affected by the presence of foreign
matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 325) or the clean image options available in some third-
party imaging applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing.
Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services).
Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally.
Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
335
n
Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity.
Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as
those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device.
To prevent condensation,
place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to
sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or
magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun
or other strong light source for an extended period.
Intense light may
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while
images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the
AC adapter is connected.
336
n
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
In
rare instances, static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark.
This
does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon return to
normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged.
Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid.
To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0 329, 331) for information on cleaning the
low-pass filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged.
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area.
If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire.
If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate.
Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a
month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
337
n
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective.
Hence while these displays may contain pixels
that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is
not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction.
Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather.
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled.
Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover.
These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function.
If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing
it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to
77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations).
Repeat this process at least
once every six months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life.
Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use.
Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially.
Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
338
n
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new battery.
• Charge the battery before use.
When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending
on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries
on short notice.
Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends
to decrease.
Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather.
Keep a spare battery in a warm
place and exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery
may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
339
n
Exposure Program (Mode P)
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph:
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO
sensitivity; the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100
equivalent.
When matrix metering is used, values over 16
1
/3 EV are
reduced to 16
1
/3 EV.
f/1.4
f/1
f/2
f/2.8
f/4
f/5.6
f/8
f/11
f/16
f/22
f/32
-4
-5
-3
12
13
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
30" 15" 8"
4" 2" 1"
24
8 153060
125 250 500
1000
2000 4000
8000
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
[
EV
]
23
16
1
/
3
f/1.4 − f/16
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G)
Shutter speed (seconds)
Aperture
340
n
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end.
If the problem
persists, turn the camera off.
If the camera does not turn off, remove and
reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and
reconnect the AC adapter.
Note that although any data currently being
recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be
affected by removing or disconnecting the power source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece
correction lenses (0 28, 324).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 18, 29).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 251, 253).
Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim: The response times
and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and
do not indicate a malfunction.
341
n
Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 19, 29).
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f9 (Slot empty release
lock; 0 269).
• Camera is not in focus (0 32).
• Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not
apply to type G and E lenses). If B is displayed in control panel, select
Aperture ring for Custom Setting f7 (Customize command dials) >
Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0 267).
• CPU lens attached with metering coupling lever raised (does not apply
to type G and E lenses; 0 167).
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting
d10 (Exposure delay mode; 0 256).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
mode: Turn HDR off (0 112).
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 59).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock
(0 66, 68).
• The shutter-release button can not be used to focus when AF-ON is
assigned as the Press option for Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button,
0 263), f5 (Assign preview button, 0 266), or f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L
button, 0 267). Use the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
Shutter speed can not be adjusted using the command dials: Flash in use.
Flash sync
speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when
using compatible flash units, choose 1/250 s (Auto FP) or 1/200 s (Auto
FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0 257).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A AE-L/AF-L
button to lock focus when AF-C is selected for focus mode.
342
n
Can not select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 64).
• Auto-area AF (0 62) or face-priority AF (0 177) selected for AF-area
mode: choose another mode.
• Camera is in playback mode (0 185) or menus are in use (0 224).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 33).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (0 68, 183).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 55).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 242).
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction (0 70, 242).
• Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction
(0 242).
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
(0 110).
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements.
If
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 329).
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 81).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 100).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 92).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created
with Df (0 96).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality
(0 55, 141).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 155).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, contrast, or saturation.
For consistent results over a series of
photos, choose another setting (0 103).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 77).
343
n
Playback
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode P, S, or A (0 38,
39, 41).
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
exposure noise reduction (0 242).
The brightness of the image in the monitor differs from the exposure of photographs
taken in live view:
• Center-weighted or spot metering is selected (0 75).
• The camera is in exposure mode M (0 174).
• The subject is too bright or too dark.
• Active D-Lighting is in effect (0 110).
• The photograph is a long time-exposure (0 44).
• The flash is used (0 116).
Flicker or banding appears during live view: Choose an option for Flicker
reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply
(0 276).
Bright bands appear during live view: A flashing sign, flash, or other light source
with brief duration was used during live view.
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +
JPEG (0 55).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 230).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 233).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 277).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 277).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 232).
Can not delete picture:
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0 201).
• Memory card is locked (0 22).
344
n
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
(0 289).
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for
Playback folder (0 230).
Can not change print order:
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 35, 203).
• Memory card is locked (0 22).
Can not print photos: NEF (RAW) or TIFF photos can not be printed by direct
USB connection. Transfer photos to computer and print using ViewNX 2
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 325). NEF (RAW)
photos can be saved in JPEG format using NEF (RAW) processing
(0 300).
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected (0 222).
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
• Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 223).
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in
documentation provided with the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer
software.
Use card reader to copy photos to computer (0 325).
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0 325).
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter.
Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed.
Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning
is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image
sensor cleaning is performed (0 275).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software
does not display effects of Picture Controls or Active D-Lighting.
Use
ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2
(available separately).
346
n
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
B
(flashes)
• Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
• Set ring to minimum
aperture (highest
f-number).
25
• CPU AI lens attached
with camera
metering coupling
lever raised (does not
apply to type G or E
lenses).
• Remove lens, lower
metering coupling
lever, and re-attach
lens.
167
H d Low battery.
Ready a fully-charged
spare battery.
29
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
• Battery exhausted. • Recharge or replace
battery.
xvi, 18,
19
• Battery can not be
used.
• Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
• Replace the battery,
or recharge the
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery is exhausted.
F
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
maximum aperture.
Aperture shown in
stops from maximum
aperture.
Aperture value will be
displayed if maximum
aperture is specified.
163
347
n
—
24
(flashes)
Camera unable to focus
using autofocus.
Change composition or
focus manually.
61, 68
(Exposure
indicators and
shutter speed
or aperture
display flash)
Subject too bright;
photo will be
overexposed.
• Use a lower ISO
sensitivity
70
• In exposure mode:
P Use optional ND
filter
38, 323
S Increase shutter
speed
39
A Choose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
41
Subject too dark; photo
will be underexposed.
• Use a higher ISO
sensitivity
70
• In exposure mode:
P Use flash 38, 116
S Lower shutter
speed
39
A Choose a larger
aperture (lower
f-number)
41
A
(flashes)
B (Bulb) selected in
exposure mode S.
Change shutter speed
or select exposure
mode M.
39, 42
%
(flashes)
T (Time) selected in
exposure mode S.
Change shutter speed
or select exposure
mode M.
39, 42
P
(flashes)
k
(flashes)
Images are being
processed.
Wait until processing is
complete.
—
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
348
n
—
c
(flashes)
If indicator flashes for
3s after flash fires,
photo may be
underexposed.
Check photo in
monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
121
n
(flashes)
j
(flashes)
Memory insufficient to
record further photos
at current settings, or
camera has run out of
file or folder numbers.
• Reduce quality or
size.
55, 58
• Delete photographs. 203
• Insert new memory
card.
19
O
(flashes)
Camera malfunction.
Release shutter.
If error
persists or appears
frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
349
n
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
No memory card. S
Camera cannot
detect memory
card.
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
correctly inserted.
19
This memory
card cannot be
used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert another
card.
W,
O
(flashes)
• Error accessing
memory card.
• Use Nikon-
approved card.
363
• Check that contacts
are clean.
If card is
damaged, contact
retailer or Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
—
• Unable to create
new folder.
• Delete files or insert
new memory card
after copying
important images
to computer or
other device.
19, 203
g
W,
O
(flashes)
Camera can not
control Eye-Fi
card.
• Check that Eye-Fi
card firmware is up
to date.
285
• Copy files on Eye-Fi
card to a computer
or other device and
format card, or
insert new card.
19
Memory card is
locked. Slide lock
to “write”
position.
W,
X
(flashes)
Memory card is
locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to
“write” position.
22
Not available if
Eye-Fi card is
locked.
W,
O
(flashes)
Eye-Fi card is
locked (write
protected).
350
n
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
[C]
(flashes)
Memory card has
not been
formatted for use
in camera.
Format memory card
or insert new
memory card.
19
Clock has been
reset
—
Camera clock is
not set.
Set camera clock. 27, 276
Failed to update
flash unit
firmware. Flash
cannot be used.
Contact a Nikon-
authorized
service
representative.
—
Firmware for flash
unit mounted on
camera was not
updated correctly.
Contact a Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
—
Unable to start
live view. Please
wait.
—
The internal
temperature of
the camera is
high.
Wait for the internal
circuits to cool before
resuming live view.
174
Folder contains
no images.
—
No images on
memory card or
in folder(s)
selected for
playback.
Select folder
containing images
from Playback folder
menu or insert
memory card
containing images.
19, 230
All images are
hidden.
—
All photos in
current folder are
hidden.
No images can be
played back until
another folder has
been selected or
Hide image used to
allow at least one
image to be
displayed.
230
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
351
n
Cannot display
this file.
—
File has been
created or
modified using a
computer or
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
File can not be played
back on camera.
—
Cannot select
this file.
—
Selected image
can not be
retouched.
Images created with
other devices can not
be retouched.
289
Check printer. — Printer error.
Check printer.
To
resume, select
Continue (if
available).
214
*
Check paper. —
Paper in printer is
not of selected
size.
Insert paper of
correct size and select
Continue.
214
*
Paper jam. —
Paper is jammed
in printer.
Clear jam and select
Continue.
214
*
Out of paper. —
Printer is out of
paper.
Insert paper of
selected size and
select Continue.
214
*
Check ink supply. —Ink error.
Check ink.
To resume,
select Continue.
214
*
Out of ink. —
Printer is out of
ink.
Replace ink and
select Continue.
214
*
* See printer manual for more information.
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
352
n
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon Df Digital Camera
Type
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective angle of view Nikon FX format
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 16.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor 36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels 16.6 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(optional Capture NX 2 software required)
Storage
Image size (pixels) • FX (36×24) image area
4928 × 3280 (#) 3696 × 2456 ($) 2464 × 1640 (%)
• DX (24×16) image area
3200 × 2128 (#) 2400 × 1592 ($) 1600 × 1064 (%)
File format • NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape; selected Picture Control can be modified;
storage for custom Picture Controls
Media SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and
SDXC memory cards
File system DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) 2.3, PictBridge
353
n
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage • FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
• DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m
–1
)
Eyepoint 15 mm (–1.0 m
–1
; from center surface of viewfinder
eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment –3–+1 m
–1
Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF
area brackets (framing grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror Quick return
Depth-of-field preview Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to value
selected by user (exposure modes A and M) or by
camera (exposure modes P and S)
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type G, E,
and D lenses (some restrictions apply to PC lenses) and
DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16 1.5× image area), AI-P
NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU lenses. IX NIKKOR lenses
and lenses for the F3AF can not be used. The electronic
rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the electronic
rangefinder supports the center 7 focus points with
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or faster
and the center 33 focus points with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/7.1 or faster).
Shutter
Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
shutter
Speed
1
/4000–4 s in steps of 1 EV (
1
/4000–30 s in steps of
1
/3 EV
with main command dial), X200 (with shutter-speed
dial only), bulb, time
Flash sync speed X=
1
/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at
1
/250 s or slower
(flash range drops at speeds between
1
/200 and
1
/250 s)
354
n
Release
Release mode S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
Frame advance rate 1–5 fps (CL) or 5.5 fps (CH)
Self-timer 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2,
or 3 s
Exposure
Metering TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor
Metering method • Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G, E, and D
lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses
if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle in
center of frame.
Diameter of circle can be changed to
8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center focus
point when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI (collapsible metering coupling
lever)
Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program (P); shutter-
priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual (M)
Exposure compensation –3 – +3EV in increments of
1
/3 EV
Exposure bracketing 2–5 frames in steps of
1
/3,
2
/3, 1, 2, or 3 EV
Flash bracketing 2–5 frames in steps of
1
/3,
2
/3, 1, 2, or 3 EV
White balance
bracketing
2–3 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
ADL bracketing 2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3-5
frames using preset values for all frames
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with A AE-L/AF-L
button
355
n
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
ISO 100 – 12800 in steps of
1
/3 EV.
Can also be set to
approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent) below ISO
100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.7, 1, 2, 3, or 4 EV (ISO 204800
equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO sensitivity
control available
Active D-Lighting Can be selected from Auto, Extra high +2/+1, High,
Normal, Low, or Off
Focus
Autofocus Nikon Multi-CAM 4800 autofocus sensor module with
TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 39 focus points
(including 9 cross-type sensors; the center 33 points are
available at apertures slower than f/5.6 and faster than
f/8, while the center 7 focus points are available at f/8)
Detection range –1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Lens servo • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo
AF (AF-C); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus point Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode Single-point AF; 9-, 21-, or 39-point dynamic-area AF,
3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing A AE-L/AF-L
button
Flash
Flash control TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is
available with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-400, or SB-300; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
is used with matrix and center-weighted metering,
standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, slow rear-
curtain sync, Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported
Exposure
356
n
Flash compensation –3 – +1 EV in increments of
1
/3 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910,
SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master flash and SB-600
or SB-R200 as remotes, or SU-800 as commander; Auto
FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination
supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except
SB-400 and SB-300; Flash Color Information
Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS-
compatible flash units
Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
White balance
White balance Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types),
direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up
to 4 values can be stored, spot white balance
measurement available during live view), choose color
temperature (2500 K–10000 K), all with fine-tuning
Live view
Lens servo • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time servo AF
(AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)
AF-area mode Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-
tracking AF
Autofocus Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects
focus point automatically when face-priority AF or
subject-tracking AF is selected)
Monitor
Monitor 8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 921k-dot (VGA), low-temperature
polysilicon TFT LCD with approx. 170 ° viewing angle,
approx. 100% frame coverage, and brightness control
Flash
357
n
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom, photo slide
shows, histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, and auto image
rotation
Interface
USB Hi-Speed USB
HDMI output Type C mini-pin HDMI connector
Accessory terminal Wireless remote controllers: WR-R10 and WR-1 (available
separately)
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS unit: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
Supported languages
Supported languages Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech,
Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil),
Romanian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish,
Ukrainian
Power source
Battery One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL14a battery
AC adapter EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power connector
(available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1
/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approx. 143.5 × 110 × 66.5 mm (5.6 × 4.3 × 2.6 in.)
Weight Approx. 765 g (1 lb 11 oz) with battery and memory
card but without body cap; approx. 710 g (1 lb 9 oz;
camera body only)
358
n
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
battery operating at the temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA): 23 ±3 °C (73.4 ±5.4 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes
that this manual may contain.
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
MH-24 battery charger
Rated input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum
Rated output DC 8.4 V/0.9 A
Supported batteries Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a
Charging time Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.), excluding
plug adapter
Weight Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz), excluding plug adapter
EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.2 V/1230 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)
Weight Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover
359
n
AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G (Special Edition)
Type Type G AF-S lens with built-in CPU and F mount
Focal length 50 mm
Maximum aperture f/1.8
Lens construction 7 elements in 6 groups (including 1 aspherical lens
element)
Angle of view • Nikon film SLR and FX-format D-SLR cameras: 47°
• Nikon DX-format D-SLR cameras: 31° 30´
Distance information Output to camera
Focusing Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Focus distance indicator 0.45 m to infinity (∞)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.5 ft) from focal plane
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range f/1.8 – 16
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 58 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 73 mm maximum diameter × 52.5 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz)
360
n
AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G
(Special Edition)
The parts of the AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G (Special Edition) are
shown below.
Lens cap
Focus distance
indicator
Lens mounting mark
Focus distance mark
CPU contacts
(0 320)
Focus mode switch
(0 25, 68)
Focus ring
(0 68, 183)
Rear lens cap
Lens hood
mounting mark
Rubber lens-mount
gasket
361
n
D Lens Care
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service center for
repair.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces.
To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or
lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
•
The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible
pouch.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust.
Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry.
Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
A Supplied Accessories
• 58 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-58
• Rear Lens Cap LF-4
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1013
• Bayonet Hood HB-47 (attaches as shown)
A Optional Accessories
• 58 mm screw-on filters
362
n
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the
memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-
compliant devices via a single cable connection.
A Trademark Information
Mac OS and OS X are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista
are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PictBridge is a
trademark.
The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C,
LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
363
n
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera.
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be
used support 2 GB cards.
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be
used are SDHC-compliant.
The camera supports UHS-I.
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which
the card will be used are SDXC-compliant.
The camera
supports UHS-I.
Other cards have not been tested.
For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
SD cards SDHC cards
2
SDXC cards
3
SanDisk
2GB
1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB
Toshiba
Panasonic
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB
48 GB, 64 GB
Lexar Media 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
—
Platinum II
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
Professional
Full-HD Video — 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
364
n
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on an 8 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I
card at different image quality (0 55), image size (0 58), and
image area settings (0 51).
❚❚ FX (36×24) Image Area
*
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX
crop.
Image quality Image size
File size
1
No. of images
1
Buffer capacity
2
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
— 15.4 MB 279 37
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
— 19.4 MB 216 29
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
— 13.9 MB 377 47
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
— 17.0 MB 315 38
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
— 26.5 MB 279 30
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
— 34.3 MB 216 25
TIFF (RGB)
Large 49.1 MB 151 21
Medium 28.3 MB 265 25
Small 13.2 MB 566 36
JPEG fine
3
Large 7.9 MB 729 100
Medium 5.4 MB 1100 100
Small 3.0 MB 2200 100
JPEG normal
3
Large 4.5 MB 1400 100
Medium 2.8 MB 2300 100
Small 1.6 MB 4300 100
JPEG basic
3
Large 2.2 MB 2800 100
Medium 1.5 MB 4600 100
Small 0.9 MB 8000 100
365
n
❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area
*
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
1 All figures are approximate.
File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO
100.
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression (0 57),
NEF (RAW) photos are taken with ISO sensitivity set to Hi 0.3 or higher, or
long exposure noise reduction or auto distortion control is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority.
Selecting
Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images
and buffer capacity drop accordingly.
Image quality Image size
File size
1
No. of images
1
Buffer capacity
2
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
— 7.2 MB 618 100
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
— 8.9 MB 484 96
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
— 6.6 MB 818 100
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
— 7.9 MB 692 100
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
— 12.0 MB 618 72
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
— 15.3 MB 484 53
TIFF (RGB)
Large 21.5 MB 349 29
Medium 12.6 MB 593 39
Small 6.2 MB 1100 69
JPEG fine
3
Large 3.7 MB 1500 100
Medium 2.8 MB 2200 100
Small 1.9 MB 3600 100
JPEG normal
3
Large 2.3 MB 2900 100
Medium 1.6 MB 4400 100
Small 1.1 MB 7100 100
JPEG basic
3
Large 1.2 MB 5700 100
Medium 0.9 MB 8600 100
Small 0.7 MB 12100 100
367
n
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged
EN-EL14a battery varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, and how the camera is used.
Sample figures are
given below.
• CIPA standard
1
: Approximately 1400 shots
• Nikon standard
2
: Approximately 2900 shots
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm
f/1.8G (Special Edition) lens under the following test conditions: lens
cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at
default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.8G (Special
Edition) lens under the following test conditions: image quality set to
JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), shutter speed
1
/250 s,
shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus
cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then
taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then
turned off; cycle repeated once standby timer expires.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using a GP-1or GP-1A GPS unit
• Using an Eye-Fi card
• Using a WU-1a wireless mobile adapter or WR-R10/WR-1 wireless
remote controllers
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL14a batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean.
Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging.
Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
368
n
Index
Symbols
P (Programmed auto)............................. 38
S (Shutter-priority auto) ........................ 39
A (Aperture-priority auto)..................... 41
M (Manual) ................................................. 42
B (Bulb) ........................................................ 44
T (Time)........................................................ 44
1/3STEP.......................................................... 40
S (Single frame) .................................... 7, 46
CL (Continuous low speed) ..... 7, 46, 254
CH (Continuous high speed)............. 7, 46
J (Quiet shutter-release).................. 7, 46
E (Self-timer)................................. 7, 46, 48
MUP (Mirror up)............................... 7, 46, 50
! (Face-priority AF).............................. 177
$ (Wide-area AF) .................................. 177
% (Normal-area AF).............................. 177
& (Subject-tracking AF).................... 177
a (Matrix).................................................. 75
Z (Center-weighted)............................. 75
b (Spot) ..................................................... 75
Fn button .................................................. 263
Pv button ........................ 41, 174, 259, 266
D button......... 137, 138, 141, 142, 145
R (Info) button............................... 11, 182
P button.................................... 14, 179, 290
a (Live view) button .................... 93, 172
d (Help)...................................................... 15
D button ........................... 5, 133, 256, 261
t (Memory buffer) ........................... 32, 47
Numerics
12-bit ........................................................... 57
14-bit ........................................................... 57
2016-pixel RGB sensor............... 354, 355
3D-tracking.................................. 62, 63, 64
A
AC adapter..................................... 323, 326
Accessories .............................................. 323
Accessory shoe....................................... 116
Accessory terminal ...................... 170, 325
Active D-Lighting......................... 110, 145
Add items (My Menu).......................... 314
Adjust viewfinder focus......................... 28
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set)....
145, 259
Adobe RGB .............................................. 240
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set)..... 136,
259
AE lock ......................................................... 77
AE only (Auto bracketing set).. 136, 259
AE-L/AF-L button ........................ 66, 77, 267
AF........................................ 59–67, 175–178
AF activation........................................... 247
AF area brackets ....................................... 28
AF fine-tune ............................................ 283
AF point illumination........................... 248
AF-area mode.................................. 62, 177
AF-assist ................................................... 122
AF-C .................................................... 59, 246
AF-C priority selection ........................ 246
AF-F............................................................ 175
AF-mode button ............ 60, 63, 175, 178
B button .............................. 60, 67, 247
AF-S............................................ 59, 175, 246
AF-S priority selection......................... 246
After delete ............................................. 233
Angle of view.......................................... 322
Aperture..................................... 41–43, 268
Aperture-priority auto ........................... 41
Aspect ratio............................................. 293
Assign AE-L/AF-L button.................... 267
Assign Fn button................................... 263
Assign preview button........................ 266
Assign remote Fn button ................... 284
Attaching the lens ................................... 24
Auto (White balance).............................. 81
Auto bracketing.................. 136, 259, 260
Auto bracketing (Mode M) ................ 260
Auto bracketing set.............................. 259
Auto distortion control....................... 241
369
n
Auto DX crop ...................................... 52, 53
Auto FP high-speed sync........... 119, 257
Auto image rotation............................. 277
Auto info display ................................... 273
Auto ISO sensitivity control.................. 72
Auto-area AF....................................... 63, 64
Autoexposure lock................................... 77
Autofocus......................... 59–67, 175–178
Autofocus mode............................. 59, 175
B
Backlight................................................... 256
Battery.................................. 18, 19, 29, 358
Battery charger ............................... 18, 358
Beep........................................................... 253
Black-and-white (Monochrome)...... 294
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) ........... 295
Body cap................................................... 324
Border (PictBridge) ............................... 216
Bracketing.......... 136, 141, 145, 259, 260
Bracketing order.................................... 260
Bulb............................................................... 44
Burst.................................................. 153, 254
C
Cable release........................................... 323
Calendar playback ................................ 197
Camera Control Pro 2........................... 325
Capture NX 2..... 56, 109, 240, 274, 277–
279, 325
CEC ............................................................. 223
Center-weighted ............................ 75, 250
Center-weighted area.......................... 250
Charging the battery .............................. 18
Choose color temp. (White balance) 82,
88
Choose image area........................... 52, 53
CL mode shooting speed................... 254
Clean image sensor.............................. 329
Clock ................................................... 26, 276
Clock battery.............................................. 27
Cloudy (White balance) ......................... 82
CLS.............................................................. 118
Color balance.......................................... 296
Color outline........................................... 306
Color sketch ............................................ 306
Color space.............................................. 240
Color temperature..................... 82, 83, 88
Compatible lenses................................ 318
Compressed (Type) ................................. 57
Continuous high speed.................... 7, 46
Continuous low speed............. 7, 46, 254
Continuous release mode ............... 7, 46
Continuous-servo AF.................... 59, 246
Control panel............................................... 8
Copyright................................................. 279
Copyright information........................ 279
CPU contacts ................................. 320, 360
CPU lens ................................... 25, 318, 320
Creative Lighting System................... 118
Cropping (PictBridge) ......................... 216
Cross screen (Filter effects)................ 295
Custom Settings.................................... 243
Custom settings bank ......................... 245
Customize command dials................ 267
Cyanotype (Monochrome)................ 294
D
Date and time ................................. 26, 276
Date format...................................... 26, 276
Daylight saving time..................... 27, 276
DCF.................................................... 240, 362
Default settings............................ 133, 224
Delete................................................. 35, 203
Delete all images................................... 205
Delete current image ................... 35, 203
Delete selected images ...................... 205
Depth-of-field ........................................... 41
Detaching the lens.................................. 25
Device control (HDMI)......................... 223
Digital Print Order Format....... 217, 219,
362
Diopter...................................................... 324
Diopter adjustment control................. 28
Direct sunlight (White balance).......... 81
Distortion control ................................. 305
D-Lighting ............................................... 291
DPOF ....................................... 217, 219, 362
370
n
DPOF print order ................................... 219
DX (24 × 16) 1.5 ×.................................... 52
DX format................................................... 52
Dynamic-area AF.............................. 62, 64
E
Easy shutter-speed shift...................... 270
Electronic rangefinder........................... 69
Exif .............................................................. 362
Exposure..................................... 75–80, 136
Exposure bracketing ......... 136, 259, 260
Exposure comp. for flash .................... 259
Exposure compensation....................... 79
Exposure compensation dial............... 79
Exposure compensation dial lock
release ....................................................... 79
Exposure delay mode .......................... 256
Exposure indicator.................................. 43
Exposure lock............................................ 77
Exposure meters............................. 33, 251
Exposure mode............................. 6, 30, 36
Exposure mode dial..................... 6, 30, 36
Exposure program ................................ 339
Eye-Fi upload.......................................... 285
Eyepiece cap ........................................... 159
F
Face-priority AF...................................... 177
File information...................................... 189
File naming.............................................. 239
File number sequence......................... 255
Filter effects............................................. 295
Fine-tune optimal exposure.............. 250
Fine-tuning white balance................... 84
Firmware version................................... 286
Fisheye ...................................................... 305
Flash............................... 116, 125, 128, 130
Flash (White balance) ............................ 82
Flash bracketing ................. 136, 259, 260
Flash compensation ............................. 128
Flash control............................................ 124
Flash mode .................................... 125, 126
Flash only (Auto bracketing set) ..... 136,
259
Flash ready indicator .................. 121, 131
Flash shutter speed.............................. 258
Flash sync speed .......................... 127, 257
Flash sync terminal............................... 117
Flexible program...................................... 38
Flicker reduction ................................... 276
Fluorescent (White balance)................ 81
f-number........................................... 37, 320
Focal length ................................... 165, 322
Focal plane mark...................................... 69
Focus distance indicator..................... 360
Focus distance mark ............................ 360
Focus indicator ........................... 31, 66, 69
Focus lock ................................................... 66
Focus mode...................................... 59, 175
Focus mode switch................. 25, 68, 360
Focus point 31, 62, 64, 69, 177, 248, 249
Focus point illumination .................... 248
Focus point wrap-around .................. 249
Focus ring ................................................ 360
Focus tracking................................. 60, 247
Focus tracking with lock-on.............. 247
Focus-mode selector .... 59, 68, 175, 183
Format memory card.................... 22, 272
Frame interval (Slide show)............... 234
Front-curtain sync ................................ 125
Full-frame playback.............................. 185
Full-time servo AF................................. 175
FV lock....................................................... 130
FX (36 × 24) 1.0 × ..................................... 52
FX format .................................................... 52
G
GPS unit........................................... 170, 325
Green intensifier (Filter effects)........ 295
H
HDMI....................................... 184, 222, 362
HDMI mini-pin connector.................. 222
HDMI-CEC................................................ 223
Help............................................................... 15
Hi (Sensitivity) ........................................... 71
Hide image.............................................. 230
High definition.............................. 222, 362
371
n
High Dynamic Range (HDR) .............. 112
High ISO NR............................................. 242
Highlights ................................................ 190
Histogram ............................. 191, 192, 261
I
Image area............................. 25, 51, 53, 58
Image comment.................................... 278
Image Dust Off ref photo................... 274
Image overlay......................................... 297
Image quality............................................. 55
Image review................................. 187, 232
Image size................................................... 58
Incandescent (White balance)............. 81
Index print ............................................... 217
In-focus indicator....................... 32, 66, 69
Information ...................................... 11, 188
Information display....................... 11, 256
Interval timer shooting ....................... 156
ISO display............................................... 254
ISO sensitivity ..................................... 70, 72
ISO sensitivity dial.................................... 70
ISO sensitivity dial lock release ........... 70
i-TTL................................................... 119, 124
J
JPEG ....................................................... 55, 57
JPEG basic................................................... 55
JPEG compression.................................... 57
JPEG fine...................................................... 55
JPEG normal............................................... 55
L
L (large)......................................................... 58
Landscape (Set Picture Control) ...... 100
Language.......................................... 26, 277
LCD illumination.................................... 256
LCD illuminator.................................. 5, 256
Lens........................... 24–25, 163, 283, 318
Lens cap.................................................... 360
Lens focus ring....................... 68, 183, 360
Lens mount ................................................ 69
Lens mounting mark............................ 360
Live view......................................... 172–184
Live view photography....................... 172
Lo (Sensitivity)........................................... 71
Location data................................. 170, 194
Lock mirror up for cleaning............... 332
Long exposure NR ................................ 242
Long time-exposures ............................. 44
Lossless compressed (Type)................. 57
Low-pass filter........................................ 329
M
M (medium)................................................ 58
Manage Picture Control ..................... 106
Manual......................................................... 42
Manual focus ................................... 68, 183
Matrix ........................................................... 75
Max. continuous release .................... 254
Maximum aperture .............. 69, 122, 320
Maximum sensitivity .............................. 73
Memory buffer................................... 32, 47
Memory card .......... 19, 22, 272, 363, 364
Memory card capacity ........................ 364
Metering ..................................................... 75
Metering selector..................................... 76
Miniature effect..................................... 308
Minimum aperture........................... 25, 37
Minimum shutter speed........................ 73
Mired ............................................................ 87
Mirror ................................................. 50, 332
Mirror up......................................... 7, 46, 50
Modeling flash....................................... 259
Monitor..................... 11, 34, 172, 185, 273
Monitor brightness .............................. 273
Monitor off delay .................................. 253
Monitor pre-flash......................... 130, 131
Monochrome.......................................... 294
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) 100
Multi selector.......................................... 262
Multiple exposure................................. 149
My Menu.................................................. 313
N
NEF (RAW).................................. 55, 57, 300
NEF (RAW) bit depth (NEF (RAW)
recording) ................................................. 57
NEF (RAW) processing......................... 300
372
n
NEF (RAW) recording ............................. 57
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ............. 100
No. of copies (PictBridge) ................... 216
Noise reduction ..................................... 242
Non-AI lens....................................... 25, 167
Non-CPU lens.......................... 25, 163, 318
Non-CPU lens data................................ 163
Normal-area AF...................................... 177
Number of focus points...................... 249
Number of photographs ............. 30, 364
O
OK button ................................................ 261
Optimal quality (JPEG compression) 57
Optional flash ......................................... 258
Output resolution (HDMI) .................. 223
Overview data ........................................ 195
P
Page size (PictBridge)........................... 216
Perspective control............................... 307
Photo information ...................... 188, 232
PictBridge....................................... 214, 362
Picture Control Utility .......................... 109
Picture Controls ........................... 100, 102
Picture size............................................... 322
Pitching..................................................... 282
Playback............................................. 34, 185
Playback display options.................... 232
Playback folder....................................... 230
Playback information................. 188, 232
Playback menu....................................... 229
Playback zoom ....................................... 199
Portrait (Set Picture Control)............. 100
Power connector......................... 323, 326
Power switch................................................ 5
L (Preset manual)......................... 82, 90
Predictive focus tracking ...................... 60
Preset manual (White balance) ... 82, 90
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down................................................. 33
Press the shutter-release button
halfway...................................................... 33
Print (DPOF)............................................. 217
Print select............................................... 217
Printing..................................................... 214
Programmed auto ................................... 38
Protecting photographs..................... 201
Q
Quick retouch......................................... 304
Quiet shutter-release......................... 7, 46
R
Rank items (My Menu) ........................ 316
Rear-curtain sync .................................. 125
Recent settings ...................................... 317
Red intensifier (Filter effects)............ 295
Red-eye correction............................... 292
Red-eye reduction................................ 125
Red-eye reduction with slow sync.. 125
Release button to use dial ................. 269
Release mode....................................... 7, 46
Release mode dial............................... 7, 46
Remote cord ............................. 44, 50, 325
Remove items (My Menu).................. 315
Reset....................................... 133, 236, 245
Resize ........................................................ 302
Restoring default settings ....... 133, 224,
236, 245
Retouch menu ....................................... 287
Reverse indicators ................................ 269
RGB.................................................... 191, 240
Rolling.............................................. 265, 282
Rotate tall................................................. 233
S
S (small)........................................................ 58
Save settings........................................... 280
Save/load settings ................................ 280
Screen tips............................................... 254
SD memory card... 19, 22, 272, 363, 364
Select date............................ 206, 217, 230
Selective color........................................ 309
Self-timer ............................... 7, 46, 48, 252
Sensitivity ............................................ 70, 72
Sepia (Monochrome)........................... 294
Set Picture Control ............................... 100
Setup menu ............................................ 271
373
n
Shade (White balance)........................... 82
Shooting data......................................... 193
Shooting menu...................................... 235
Shooting menu bank........................... 236
Shutter speed.............................. 39, 40, 42
Shutter-priority auto............................... 39
Shutter-release button..... 31, 33, 66, 77,
131
Shutter-release button AE-L.............. 251
Shutter-speed dial ..................... 39, 40, 42
Shutter-speed dial lock release.... 39, 42
Side-by-side comparison ................... 311
Single frame.......................................... 7, 46
Single-point AF .................................. 62, 64
Single-servo AF...................... 59, 175, 246
Size ................................................................ 58
Size priority (JPEG compression)........ 57
Skylight (Filter effects)......................... 295
Slide show................................................ 234
Slot empty release lock....................... 269
Slow sync ................................................. 125
Soft (Filter effects)................................. 295
Spot............................................................... 75
Spot white balance.................................. 93
sRGB........................................................... 240
Standard (Set Picture Control).......... 100
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR 119,
124
Standby timer......................... 33, 170, 251
Start printing (PictBridge)......... 216, 219
Storage folder......................................... 237
Straighten................................................ 304
Subject-tracking AF.............................. 177
Sync terminal.......................................... 117
T
Television ................................................. 222
Thumbnail ............................................... 261
Thumbnail playback ............................ 196
TIFF................................................................ 55
Time .............................................................. 44
Time stamp (PictBridge) ..................... 216
Time zone.......................................... 26, 276
Time zone and date....................... 26, 276
Timer .................................................. 48, 156
Trim............................................................ 293
Tripod............................................................. 3
Two-button reset .................................. 133
Type (NEF (RAW) recording)................. 57
Type D lens..................................... 318, 320
Type E lens...................................... 318, 320
Type G lens..................................... 318, 320
U
Uncompressed (Type)............................ 57
USB cable........................................ 211, 214
UTC............................................. 26, 171, 194
V
Viewfinder .......................... 9, 28, 324, 353
Viewfinder focus ............................ 28, 324
Viewfinder grid display....................... 253
ViewNX 2... 56, 109, 208, 211, 240, 277–
279
Vignette control .................................... 241
Virtual horizon ..................... 182, 265, 282
Vivid (Set Picture Control).................. 100
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)................... 295
WB ....................................................... 81, 141
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set) .....
141, 259
White balance ................................. 81, 141
White balance bracketing.................. 141
Wide-area AF.......................................... 177
Wireless mobile adapter............ 284, 324
Wireless remote controller ......... 44, 325
374
Printed in Japan
SB4C02(11)
6MB19111-02
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
